University of Virginia Library

Search this document 
Bucaniers of America:

containing the dangerous voyage and bold attempts of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others; performed upon the coasts of the South Sea, for the space of two years, &c. from the original journal of the said voyage
  
  
  
  

collapse sectionIV. 
BUCANIERS OF AMERICA.
The Second Volume.
 I. 
 II. 
 III. 
 IV. 
 V. 
 VI. 
 VII. 
 VIII. 
 IX. 
 X. 
 XI. 
 XII. 
 XIII. 
 XIV. 
 XV. 
 XVI. 
 XVII. 
 XVIII. 
 XIX. 
 XX. 
 XXI. 
 XXII. 
 XXIII. 
 XXIV. 
 XXV. 

  
expand section 

1

Page 1

IV. BUCANIERS
OF
AMERICA.

IV. The Second Volume.

PART IV.

Containing the dangerous Voyage, and bold Assaults
of Captain
Bartholomew Sharp, and others, performed
in the South Sea, for the space of two
years,
&c.

CHAP. I.

Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp, and others, set
forth in a Fleet towards the Province of
Darien,
upon the Continent of America. Their designs
to pillage and plunder in those parts. Number
of their Ships, and strength of their Forces by
Sea and Land.

AT a place called Boca del Toro, was the gene-

The place
where they met
together.
ral Rendezvouz of the Fleet, which lately had
taken and sackt Puerto Velo the second time;
that rich place having been plundered once
before, under the Conduct of Sir Henry Morgan,
as is related in the History of the Bucaniers. At this

2

Page 2
place also were two other Vessels; the one belonging unto
Captain Peter Harris, and the other unto Captain Richard
Sawkins;
both Englishmen and Privateers. Here
therefore a report was made unto the Fleet, of a Peace
concluded between the Spaniards and the Indians of the
Land of Darien, who for the most part wage incessant Wars
against one another. Also, that since the conclusion of the
said Peace, they had been already tryed, and found very
faithful unto Captain Bournano, a French Commander, in
an attempt on a certain place called Chepo, nigh the
South Sea. Further, that the Indians had promised to
conduct him unto a great and very rich place, named Tocamora:
upon which he had likewise promised them to return
in three Months time with more Ships and Men.
They resolve
for
Tocamora.
Hereupon we all agreed to go visit the said place, and thus
dispersed our selves into several Coves, (by the Spaniards
called Cúèvas, or hollow creeks under the Coasts) there to
careen and fit our Vessels for that purpose. In this place
Boca del Toro, we found plenty of fat Tortoises; the pleasantest
meat in the world. When we had refitted our Vessels,
we met at an Island, called by us, the Water-key; and
this was then our strength, as followeth.

                   
Tuns.  Guns.  Men. 
Captain Coxon in a Ship of  80  97 
Captain Harris in another of  150  25  107 
Captain Bournáno  90  86 
Captain Sawkins  16  35 
Captain Sharp  25  40 
Captain Cook  35  00  43 
Captain Alleston  18  00  24 
Captain Row  20  00  25 
Captain Macket  14  00  20 

They set sail
and touch at
the
Zamblas.
We sailed from thence March the 23. 1679. and in our
way touched at the Islands called Zamblas. These are certain
Islands reaching eight Leagues in extent, and lying
fourteen Leagues Westward of the River of Darien. Being
here at an Anchor, many of the Indians, both men and

3

Page 3
women, came to see us. Some brought Plantans, others
other Fruits, and Venison, to exchange with us for Beads,
Needles, Knives, or any trifling bauble whereof they stand
in need. But what they most chiefly covet are Axes and
Hatchets to fell Timber withal. The men here go naked,
Habit of the
Indians of
those Isles.
as having only a sharp and hollow tip, made either of Gold,
Silver, or Bark, into which they thrust their Privy Members;
the which tip they fasten with a string about their
middle. They wear as an ornament in their Noses, a golden
or silver Plate, in shape like unto a Half Moon; which
when they drink, they hold up with one hand, mean while
they lift the cup with the other. They paint themselves
sometimes with streaks of black; as the women do in like
manner, with red. These have in their Noses a pretty
thick ring of Gold or Silver; and for cloathing, they cover
themselves with a Blanket. They are generally well featured
women: among whom I saw several fairer than the
fairest of Europe, with Hair like unto the finest flax. Of
these it is reported, they can see far better in the dark, than
in the light.

These Indians misliked our design for Tocamora, and dis-

They change
their design
of
Tocamora
for another.
swaded us from it, asserting it would prove too tedious a
march, and the way so mountainous, and uninhabited, that
it would be extream difficult to get Provisions for our men.
Withal, they proffered to guide us undiscryed, within few
Leagues of the City of Panama, in case we were pleased
to go thither; where we could not choose but know our
selves, we should not fail of making a good Voyage. Upon
these, and other reasons which they gave us, we concluded
to desist from the Journey of Tocamora, and to proceed
to Panama. Having taken up these Resolutions,
Captain Bournano and Captain Row's Vessels separated from
us, as being all French, and not willing to go to Panama,
they declaring themselves generally against a long march
by Land. Thus we left them at the Zamblas. From
thence an Indian Captain, or chief Commander, named
They go to the
Golden Island
Andræas, conducted us to another Island, called by the Eng-

4

Page 4
lish, the Golden Island, situated something to the westward
of the mouth of the great River of Darien. At this Island
we met, being in all seven Sail, on the third of April, 1680.

They set forth
for
Sancta Maria.

Here at the Golden Island, the Indians gave us notice of
a Town called Sancta Maria, situate on a great River, which
beareth the same name, and which runneth into the South
Sea, by the Gulf of San Miguèl. That in the Town was
kept a Garrison of four hundred Souldiers; and that from
this place much Gold was carried to Panama, which was gathered
from the Mountains thereabouts. That in case we
should not find sufficient purchase there, we might from
thence proceed by Sea to Panama, where we could not easi-
331. men landed.

ly fail of our designs. This motion of the Indians we
liked so well, that we landed three hundred and thirty one
men, on April the 5th 1680. leaving Captain Alleston, and
Mackett, with a party of Seamen, to guard our Ships in
our absence; with which we intended to return home.

Their Provision
and Colours
These men that were landed, had each of them three or
four Cakes of Bread, (called by the English Dough-boy's)
for their provision of Victuals; and as for drink, the Rivers
afforded them enough. At that time of our Landing, Captain
Sharp was very faint and weak, as having had a great
fit of sickness lately, which he had scarcely recovered. Our
several Companies that marched, were distinguished as followeth.
First, Captain Bartholomew Sharp with his Company
had a red Flag, with a bunch of white and green Ribbons.
The second Division led by Captain Richard Sawkins,
with his men had a red Flag striped with yellow.
The third and fourth, which were led by Captain Peter
Harris,
had two green Flags, his Company being divided
into two several Divisions. The fifth and sixth, which being
led by Captain John Coxon, who had some of Alleston's
and Macketts men joyned unto his, made two Divisions or
Companies, had each of them a red Flag. The seventh
was led by Captain Edmond Cook with red Colours striped
with yellow, with a Hand and Sword for his devise. All, or
most of them, were Armed with Fuzee, Pistol, and Hanger.


5

Page 5

CHAP. II.

They march towards the Town of Santa Maria
with design to take it. The Indian King of
Darien meeteth them by the way. Difficulties
of this March, with other occurrences till they
arrive at the place.

BEing landed on the Coast of Darien, and divided into

First days
march.
Companies, as was mentioned in the preceding Chapter,
we began our march towards Santa Maria, the Indians
serving us for guides in that unknown Country. Thus we
marched at first through a small skirt of a wood, and then
over a bay almost a League in length. After that, we
went two Leagues directly up a woody valley, where we
saw here and there an old Plantation, and had a very good
path to march in. There we came to the side of a River,
which in most places was dry, and built us Houses, or rather
Huts to lodge in.

Unto this place came unto us another Indian, who was

An Indian
Commander
joyneth them.
a chief Commander, and a man of great parts, named
Captain Antonio. This Indian Officer encouraged us very
much to undertake the Journey of Santa Maria, and promised
to be our Leader; saying, he would go along with
us now, but that his Child lay very sick. However, he
was assured, it would dye by next day; and then he would
most certainly follow and overtake us. Withal, he desired
we would not lye in the grass, for fear of monstrous Adders,
which are very frequent in those places. Breaking some of
the stones that lay in the River, we found them shine with,
sparks of Gold. These stones are driven down from the
neighbouring Mountains in time of floods. This day four
Four of their
number return
back.
of our men tyred, and returned back unto the Ships. So

6

Page 6
we remained in all 327 men, with six Indians to conduct
us. That night some showers of rain fell.

Second days
march.
The next day of our march we mounted a very steep
hill, and on the other side, at the foot thereof, we rested
on the bank of a River, which Captain Andræas told us,
did run into the South Sea; being the same River on
which the Town of Santa Maria was situated. Hence we
continued our march until noon, and then ascended another
Mountain extreamly higher than the former. Here
we ran much danger oftentimes, and in many places, the
Mountain being so perpendicular, and the path so narrow,
that but one man at a time could pass. We arrived by the
dark of the evening to the other side of the Mountain, and
lodged again by the side of the same River, having marched
that day, according to our reckoning, about eighteen
miles. This night likewise some rain did fall.

Third days
march.
The next morning, being April the 7th, we marched all
along the River aforementioned, crossing it often, almost at
every half mile, sometimes up to the knees, and at other
times up to the middle, in a very swift current. About
noon we came to a place, where we found some Indian houses.
These were very large and neat: the sides were built
with Cabbage-trees, and the roofs of wild Canes, being, over
Manner of the
houses of
Darien.

them, thatcht with Palmito Royal, but far more neater than
ours at Jamaica. They had many divisions into rooms,
though no ascent by stairs into Chambers. At this place
were four of these houses together, that is, within a stones
throw one of another, each of them having a large Plantane
walk before it. At the distance of half a mile from
this place, lived the King or chief Captain of these Indians
The King of
Darien meeteth
them.
of Darien, who came to visit us in Royal Robes, with his
Queen and Family. His Crown was made of small white
reeds, which were curiously woven, having no other top
than its lining, which was red silk. Round about the middle
of it was a thin plate of gold, more than two inches
His habit and
attire.
broad, laced behind; from whence did stick two or three
Ostrich feathers. About this plate went also a row of golden

7

Page 7
beads, which were bigger than ordinary pease; underneath
which the red lining of the Crown was seen. In his
nose he wore a large plate of gold, in form of an half
Moon; and in each ear a great golden ring, nigh four inches
in diameter, with a round thin plate of Gold of the
same breadth, having a small hole in the center, and by that
hanging to the ring. He was covered with a thin white
cotton robe, reaching unto the small of his legs, and round
its bottom a fringe of the same three inches deep. So that
by the length of this Robe, our sight was impeded, that we
could see no higher than his naked Ankles. In his hand he
had a long bright Lance, as sharp as any knife. With him
he had three Sons, each of them having a white Robe, and
their Lances in their hands, but standing bare-headed before
him; as also were eight or nine persons more of his
Retinue, or Guard. His Queen wore a red Blanket, which
Attire of the
Queen.
was closely girt about her wast: and another that came
loosely over her head and shoulders, like unto our old fashion
striped hangings. She had a young Child in her arms,
and two Daughters walked by her, both Mariageable, with
their faces almost covered with stripes or streaks of red, and
about their Neck and Arms, almost loaden with small Beads
of several colours. These Indian women of the Province
of Darien, are generally very free, airy, and brisk; yet
withal very modest, and cautious in their Husbands presence,
of whose jealousie they stand in fear. With these Indians
we made an exchange, or had a truck, as it is called, for
Knives, Pins, Needles, or any other such like trifles but in our
dealing with them we found them to be very cunning. Here
we rested our selves for the space of one day; and withal,
chose Captain Sawkins to lead the Forlorn, unto whom,
for that purpose, we gave the choice of Fourscore men.
The King ordered us each man to have three Plantans,
with Sugar-canes to suck, by way of a Present. But when
these were consumed, if we would not truck we must have
starved; for the King himself did not refuse to deal for his
Plantans. This fort of Fruit is first reduced to mash, then

8

Page 8
laid between leaves of the same tree, and so used with water;
after which preparation they call it Miscelaw.

Fourth days
march.
On April the Ninth we continued our march along the
banks of the River abovementioned, finding in our way
here and there a House. The owners of the said Houses
would most commonly stand at the door, and give, as we
passed by, to every one of us, either a ripe Plantane, or
some sweet Cazave-root. Some of them would count us
by dropping a grain of Corn for each man that passed before
them; for they know no greater number, nor can
tell no farther then Twenty. That night we arrived at
three great Indian Houses, where we took up our Lodgings,
the weather being clear and serene all night.

Fifth days
march.
The next day Captain Sharp, Captain Coxon, and Captain
Cook, with about threescore and ten of our men, embarked
themselves in fourteen Canoas upon the River, to
glide down the stream. Among this number I did also
embark; and we had in our company our Indian Captain
Andræas, of whom mention was made above; and two
Indians more in each Canoa, to Pilot or guide us down the
River. But if it was so that we were tired in travelling
by Land before, certainly we were in a worser condition
now in our Canoas. For at the distance of almost every
stones cast, we were constrained to quit, and get out of our
Boats, and hale them over either Sands or Rocks: at other
times over Trees that lay cross and filled up the River, so
that they hindred our Navigation; yea, several times over
the very points of Land it self. That night we built our
selves Huts to shelter in upon the River side, and rested our
wearied Limbs until next morning.

Sixth days
march.
This being come, we prosecuted our Journey all day long
with the same fatigue and toil, as we had done the day before.
At night came a Tygre and looked on us for
some while, but we dared not to fire at the Animal, fearing
we should be descryed by the sound of our Fuzees: the Spaniards,
as we were told, not being at much distance from
that place.


9

Page 9

But the next day, which was April the Twelfth, out

Seventh days
march.
pain and labour was rather doubled than diminished; not
only for the difficulties of the way, which was intolerable,
but chiefly for the absence of our main body of men,
from whom we had parted the day before. For now hearing
no news of them, we grew extreamly jealous of the Indians
and their Councels, suspecting it a design of those
people thus to divide our Forces, and then cutting us off,
betray us unto the Spaniards our implacable Enemies. That
night we rested our selves by building of Huts, as we had
done, and hath been mentioned before.

On Tuesday morning, the next ensuing day, we conti-

Eighth days
march.
nued our Navigation down the River, and arrived at a
beachy point of Land; at which place another Arm joyneth
the same River. Here, as we understood, the Indians
of Darien did usually Rendezvous, whensoever they drew
up in a Body, with intention to fight their ancient Enemies
the Spaniards. Here also we made a hault, or stayed for
the rest of our Forces and Company, the Indians having
now sent to seek them, as being themselves not a little
concerned at our dissatisfaction and jealousies. In the afternoon
our Companions came up with us, and were hugely
glad to see us, they having been in no less fear for us, than
we had been at the same time for them. We continued
and rested there that night also, with design to fit our Arms
for action, which now, as we were told, was nigh at hand.

We departed from thence early the next morning, which

Ninth days
march.
was the last day of our march, being in all now, the number
of threescore and eight Canoa's, wherein were imbarked
327 of us Englishmen, and 50 Indians, who served us
for Guides. Unto the point above-mentioned, the Indians
had hitherto guided our Canoas with long Poles or sticks;
but now we made our selves Oars and Paddles to row withal,
and thereby make what speed we could. Thus we
rowed with all hast imaginable, and upon the River hapned
to meet two or three Indian Canoas that were laded
with Plantans. About midnight we arrived and landed at
They arrive at
Santa Maria.

10

Page 10
the distance of half a mile, more or less, from the Town of
Santa Maria, whither our march was all along intended.
The place where we landed was deeply muddy, insomuch,
that we were constrained to lay our paddles on the mud to
wade upon, and withal, lift our selves up by the boughs of
the trees, to support our Bodies from sinking. Afterwards
we were forced to cut our way through the woods for some
space, where we took up our Lodgings for that night, for
fear of being discovered by the Enemy, unto whom we
were so nigh.

CHAP. III.

They take the Town of Santa Maria with no loss of
Men, and but small purchase of what they sought
for. Description of the Place, Country, and
River adjacent. They resolve to go and plunder
the second time the City of
Panama.

They assault
the Town and
Fort.
THe next morning, which was Thursday April the Fifteenth,
about break of day, we heard from the
Town a small Arm discharged, and after that a Drum beating
a travailler. With this we were roused from our sleep,
and taking up our Arms, we put our selves in order and
marched towards the Town. As soon as we came out of the
Woods into the open ground, we were descryed by the
Spaniards, who had received before-hand intelligence of
our coming, and were prepared to receive us, having already
conveyed away all their Treasure of Gold, and sent
it to Panama. They ran immediately into a large Palizada
Fort, having each Pale or Post twelve foot high, and
began to fire very briskly at us as we came. But our
Vanguard ran up unto the place, and pulling down two
They take the
place.
or three of their Palizadas, entred the Fort incontinently,

11

Page 11
and made themselves Masters thereof. In this Action there
were not fifty of our men that came up before the Fort
was taken; and on our side only two were wounded, and
not one killed. Notwithstanding within the place were
found two hundred and threescore men, besides which
number, two hundred others were said to be absent, being
gone up into the Countrey unto the Mines to fetch down
Gold, or rather to convey away what was already in
the Town. This golden Treasure cometh down another
branch of this River unto Santa Maria, from the neighbouring
Mountains, where are thought to be the richest Mines
of the Indies, or, at least, of all these parts of the Western
World. Of the Spaniards we killed in the assault twenty
six, and wounded to the number of sixteen more. But
their Governour, their Priest, and all, or most of their chief
men, made their escape by flight.

Having taken the Fort, we expected to find here a con-

Description of
the Town.
siderable Town belonging unto it. But it proved to be
only some wild houses made of Cane, the place being chiefly
a Garrison designed to keep the Indians in subjection,
who bare a mortal hatred, and are often apt to rebel against
the Spaniards. But as bad a place as it was, our fortune
was much worse. For we came only three days too late, or
else we had met with three hundred weight of Gold, which
They miss of
their designs.
was carried thence to Panama in a Bark, that is sent from
thence twice or thrice every year, to fetch what Gold
is brought to Santa Maria from the Mountains. This River,
called by the name of the Town, is hereabouts twice
as broad as the River of Thames is at London, and floweth
above threescore miles upwards, rising to the heighth of
two fathom and a half at the Town it self. As soon as we
had taken the place, the Indians who belonged to our company,
and had served us for Guides, came up unto the Town.
For mean while they heard the noise of the Guns, they were
in a great consternation, and dared not approach the
Palizadas, but had hidden themselves closely in a small hollow
ground, insomuch that the bullets, while we were
fighting flew over their heads.


12

Page 12

They redeem
the Kings
Daughter.
Here we found and redeemed the eldest Daughter of the
King of Darien, of whom we made mention above. She
had, as it should seem, been forced away from her Fathers
house by one of the Garison, (which Rape had hugely incensed
him against the Spaniards) and was with Child by
him. After the Fight the Indians destroyed as many more
of the Spaniards, as we had done in the assault, by taking
them into the adjoyning Woods, and there stabbing them
to death with their Lances. But so soon as we understood
this their barbarous cruelty, we hindred them from taking
any more out of the Fort, where we confined them every
one Prisoners. Captain Sawkins with a small party of ten
They pursue
such as were
fled.
more, put himself into a Canoa, and went down the
River, to pursue and stop, if it were possible, those that had
escaped, who were the chiefest of the Town and Garrison.
But now our great expectations of making an huge purchase
of Gold at this place being totally vanished, we were
unwilling to come so far for nothing, or go back emptyhanded;
especially, considering what vast riches were to
be had at no great distance from thence. Hereupon, we
resolved to go for Panama, which place if we could take,
we were assured we should get Treasure enough, to satisfie
our hungry appetite of Gold and Riches, that City being
the receptacle of all the Plate, Jewels, and Gold that is digged
out of the Mines of all Potosi and Peru. Unto this effect
therefore, and to please the humours of some of our com-
Captain Coxon
chosen.
pany, we made choice of Captain Coxon to be our General,
or Commander in chief. Before our departure, we sent
back what small booty we had taken here by some prisoners,
and these under the charge of twelve of our men to convey
it unto the Ships.

They depart for
Panama.
Thus we prepared to go forward on that dangerous enterprize
of Panama. But the Indians who had conducted
us having gotten from us what Knives, Sizars, Axes, Needles,
and Beads they could obtain, would not stay any longer,
but all, or the greatest part of them returned to their
The Indians
leave them.
home. Which notwithstanding, the King himself, Captain

13

Page 13
Andræas, Captain Antonio, the Kings Son, called by the Spa-
The chiefest remain.

niards, Bonete de Oro, or King Golden cap, as also his Kinsman,
would not be perswaded by their falling off to leave
us, but resolved to go to Panama, out of the desire they
had to see that place taken and sackt. Yea, the King promised,
if there should be occasion, to joyn fifty thousand
men unto our Forces. Besides which promises, we had also
another encouragement very considerable to undertake
this journey. For the Spaniard who had forced away the
Kings Daughter, as was mentioned above, fearing lest
we should leave him to the mercy of the Indians, who
would have had but little on him, having shewed themselves
so cruel unto the rest of his Companions, for the safety
of his life had promised to lead us, not only into the
Town, but even to the very bed-chamber door of the Governour
of Panama, and that we should take him by the
hand, and seize both him and the whole City, before we
should be discovered by the Spaniards, either before or after
our arrival.

CHAP. IV.

The Bucaniers leave the Town of Santa Maria, and
proceed by Sea to take
Panama. Extream difficulties,
with sundry accidents and dangers of
that Voyage.

HAving been in possession of the Town of Santa Ma-

Their departure
from
Santa
Maria.
ria, only the space of two days, we departed from
thence on Saturday April the 17th 1680. We embarked
all in Thirty five Canoas, and a Periagua, which we had
taken here lying at anchor before the Town. Thus we
sailed, or rather rowed down the River, in quest of the
South Sea, upon which Panama is seated, towards the Gulf

14

Page 14
of Belona, whereat we were to disembogue into that Ocean.
Our prisoners, the Spaniards, begged very earnestly
they might be permitted to go with us, and not be left abandoned
unto the mercy of the Indians, who would shew
them no favour, and whose cruelty they so much feared.
But we had much ado to find sufficient number of boats
for our selves, the Indians that left us, had taken with them,
either by consent or slealth, so many Canoas. Yet notwithstanding
they found soon after either Bark Logs, or old
Canoas, and by that means shifted so well for their lives,
as to come along with us. Before our departure we burnt
They burn the
Town and
Fort.
both the Fort, the Church, and the Town, which was done
at the request of the King, he being extreamly incensed against
it.

Misfortunes of
the Author.
Among these Canoas, it was my misfortune to have
one that was very heavy, and consequently sluggish. By
this means we were left behind the rest a little way, our
number being only four men, besides my self, that were
embarked therein. As the Tyde fell, it left several shoals of
sand naked; and hence, we not knowing of the true Channel,
amongst such variety of streams, hapned to steer within
a shoal, above two mile, before we perceived our error.
Hereupon, we were forced to lye by until high water
came; for to row in such heavy boats as those are against
the Tide, is a thing totally impossible. As soon as the
Tyde began to turn, we rowed away in prosecution of our
Voyage, and withal, made what hast we could, but all our
endeavours were in vain, for we neither could find, nor overtake
our Companions. Thus about ten of the clock at
night, the Tyde being low water, we stuck up an Oar
in the River, and slept by turns in our Canoa, several showers
of rain falling all the night long, with which we were
throughly pierced to the skin.

But the next morning, no sooner day was come, when

They increase
upon him.
we rowed away down the River, as before, in pursuit of our
people. Having gon about the space of two Leagues, we
were so fortunate as to overtake them. For they had lain

15

Page 15
that night at an Indian Hut, or Embarcadero, that is to say,
landing place, and had been filling of water till then i'th'
morning. Being arrived at the place, they told us, that we
must not omit to fill our Jars there with water, otherwise
we should meet with none in the space of six days time.
Hereupon we went every one of us the distance of a quarter
of a mile from the Embarcadero, unto a little Pond, to
fill our water in Calabazas, making withal what hast we
could back unto our Canoa. But when we returned, we
found not one of our men, they all being departed, and already
got out of sight. Such is the procedure of these
wild men, that they care not in the least whom they loose
of their company, or leave behind. We were now more
troubled in our minds than before, fearing lest we should
fall into the same misfortune we had so lately overcome.

Hereupon we rowed after them, as fast as we possibly
could, but all in vain. For here are found such huge numbers
of Islands, greater and lesser, as also Keys about the
mouth of the River, that it was not difficult for us, who
were unacquainted with the River, to loose our selves a second
time amongst them. Yet notwithstanding, though
with much trouble and toil, we found at last that mouth of
the River, that is called by the Spaniards, Boca chica, or
the Little mouth. But as it hapned, it was now young
flood, and the stream ran very violent against us. So that
though we were not above a stones cast, from the said
mouth, and this was within a League broad, yet we could
not by any means come near it. Hence we were forced
to put ashoar, which we did accordingly, until the time of
high-water. We haled our Canoa close by the bushes, and
when we got out, we fastned our Rope unto a Tree, which
the Tyde had almost covered, for it sloweth here nigh four
fathom deep.

As soon as the Tyde began to turn, we rowed away

He is in great
dangers in the
Gulf.
from thence unto an Island, distant about a League and an
half from the mouth of the River, in the Gulf of San Miguel.
Here in the Gulf it went very hard with us, whensoever

16

Page 16
any wave dashed against the sides of our Canoa,
for it was nigh twenty foot in length, and yet not quite
one foot and a half in breadth where it was at the broadest.
So that we had just room enough to sit down in her, and
a little water would easily have both filled and overwhelmed
us. At the Island aforesaid, we took up our resting place
for that night, though for the loss of our company, and the
great dangers we were in, the sorrowfullest night that until
then, I ever experimented in my whole life. For it rained
impetuously all night long, insomuch that we were wet
from head to foot, and had not one dry thred about us;
neither through the violence of the rain, were we able to
keep any fire burning wherewith to warm or dry us. The
Tide ebbeth here a good half mile from the mark of high
water, and leaveth bare wonderful high, and sharp pointed
rocks. We passed this heavy and tedious night without
one sole minute of sleep, being all very sorrowful to see
our selves so far and remote from the rest of our companions,
as also totally destitute of all humane comfort. For
a vast Sea surrounded us on the one side, and the mighty
power of our Enemies the Spaniards on the other. Neither
could we descry at any hand the least thing to relieve us,
all that we could see being the wide sea, high Mountains and
Rocks; mean while our selves were confined to an Eggshell,
instead of a Boat, without so much as a few cloaths
to defend us from the injuries of the weather. For at that
time none of us had a shooe to our feet. We searched the
whole Key, to see if we could find any water, but found
none.


17

Page 17

CHAP. V.

Shipwrack of Mr. Ringrose the Author of this Narrative.
He is taken by the
Spaniards, and miraculously
by them preserved. Several other accidents
and disasters which befel him after the
loss of his Companions till he found them again.
Description of the Gulf of
Vallona.

ON Munday April the Nineteenth, at break of day, we

They put out to
Sea again in
the Canoa.
halled our Canoa into the water again, and departing
from the Island aforementioned: both wet and cold, as
we were, we rowed away towards the Punta de San Lorenzo,
or Point St. Lawrence. In our way we met with several
Islands which lye stragling thereabouts. But now
we were again so hard put to it, by the smalness of our vessel,
and being in an open sea, that it was become the work
of one man, yea sometimes of two, to cast out the water,
which came in on all sides of our Canoa. After strugling
for some while with these difficulties, as we came near unto
one of those Islands, a Sea came and overturned our
And are cast
away.
Boat, by which means we were all forced to swim for our
lives. But we soon got unto the Shoar, and to the same
place our Canoa came tumbling after us. Our Arms were
very fast lashed unto the inside of the Boat, and our Locks
as well cased and waxed down as was possible; so were also
our Catouche Boxes and powder-horns. But all our
Bread and fresh water was utterly spoiled and lost.

Our Canoa being tumbled on shoar by the force of the

Another shipwrack.

waves, our first business was to take out and clear our Arms.
This we had scarcely done, but we saw another Canoa run
the same misfortune at a little distance to Leeward of us, amongst
a great number of Rocks that bounded the Island.

18

Page 18
The persons that were cast away proved to be six Spaniards
of the Garison of Santa Maria, who had found an old
Canoa, and had followed us to escape the cruelty of the
Indians. They presently came unto us, and made us a fire;
which being done, we got our meat and broyled it on the
coals, and all of us eat amicably together. But we stood
in great need of water, or any other drink to our Victuals,
not knowing in the least where to get any. Our Canoa was
thrown up by the waves to the edge of the water, and there
was no great fear of its splitting, as being full six inches in
thickness on the sides thereof. But that in which the Spaniards
came, split it self against the Rocks, as being old and
slender, into an hundred pieces. Though we were thus
shipwrackt and driven ashoar, as I have related, yet otherwise,
and at other times, is this Gulf of San Miguel a meer
Mill-pond for smoothness of water.

They consult about
their affairs.

My company was now altogether for returning, and to
proceed no farther, but rather for living amongst the Indians,
in case they could not reach the Ships we had left behind
us in the Northern Sea. But with much ado I prevailed
with them to go forward, at least one day longer, and
in case we found not our people the next day, that then I
would be willing to do any thing which they should think
fit. Thus we spent two or three hours of the day in consulting
about our affairs, and withal keeping a man to
watch and look out on all sides, for fear of any surprizal by
the Indians, or other Enemies. About the time that we
were come to a conclusion in our debates, our watchman
by chance spyed an Indian; who, as soon as he saw us, ran
into the woods. I sent immediately two of my company
after him, who overtook him, and found that he was one
of our friendly Indians. Thus he carryed them unto a
place not far distant from thence, where seven more of his
company were, with a great Canoa which they had brought
with them. They came unto the place where I was with
the rest of my company, and seemed to be glad to meet
us on that Island. I asked them by signs for the main body

19

Page 19
of our Company; and they gave me to understand,
that in case we would go with them in their Canoa, which
was much bigger than ours, we should be up with the
Party by the next morning. This news, as may easily be
supposed, not a little rejoyced our hearts.

Presently after this friendly invitation, they asked who

The Author saveth
the lives
of the
Spaniards.

the other six men were, whom they saw in our company,
for they easily perceived us not to be all of one and the
same coat and lingua. We told them they were Wankers,
which is the name they commonly give unto the Spaniards
in their own Language. Their next question was, if they
should kill those Spaniards? but I answered them, No, by
no means, I would not consent to have it done. With
which answer they seemed to be satisfied for that present.
But a little while after, my back being turned, my company
thinking that they should oblige thereby the Indians,
beckned unto them to kill the Spaniards. With this, the
poor Creatures perceiving the danger that threatned them,
made a sad shreek and outcry, and I came time enough to
save all their lives. But withal, I was forced to give way
and consent, they should have one of them, for to make him
their slave. Hereupon I gave the Canoa that I came in
unto the five Spaniards remaining, and bid them get away
and shift for their lives, lest those cruel Indians should
not keep their word, and they run again the same danger
they had so lately escaped. Having sent them away, mean
while I rested my self, here I took a Survey of this Gulf,
and the mouth of the River, the which I finished the same
day, and do here present unto the view of the Reader.


20

Page 20
[ILLUSTRATION]

21

Page 21

But now, thanks be to God, joyning company with

They put to sea
again, and are
made prisoners.
those Indians, we were got into a very large Canoa, the
which for its bigness, was better able to carry twenty men,
than our own that we had brought to carry five. The
Indians had also fitted a very good Sail unto the said Canoa;
so that having now a fresh and strong gale of wind, we set
sail from thence, and made therewith brave way, to the infinite
joy and comfort of our hearts, seeing our selves so
well accommodated, and so happily rid of the miseries we
but lately had endured. We had now a smooth and easie
passage, after such tedious and laboursome pains as we had
sustained in coming so far since we left Santa Maria. Under
the point of St. Lawrence, mentioned above, is a very
great ripling of the Sea, occasioned by a strong current
which runneth hereabouts, and which oftentimes almost
filled our Boat with its dashes, as we sailed. This evening,
after our departure from the Island where we were cast away,
it rained vehemently for several hours, and the night
proved to be very dark. About nine of the clock that
night we descryed two fires on the shoar of the Continent,
over against us. These fires were no sooner perceived by
the Indians of our Canoa, but they began to shout for joy,
and cry out, Captain Antonio, Captain Andræas, the names
of their Indian Captains and Leaders; and to affirm, they
were assured those fires were made by their Companions.
Hence they made for the shoar towards those fires, as fast
as they could drive. But so soon as our Canoa came amongst
the breakers, nigh the shoar, out came from the
Woods above threescore Spaniards with Clubs and other
Arms, and laying hold on our Canoa on both sides thereof,
halled it out of the water quite dry. So that by this means
we were all suddainly taken and made their prisoners. I
laid hold of my Gun, thinking to make some defence for
my self, but all was in vain; for they as suddainly seized
me between four or five of them, and hindred me from action.
I'th' mean while our Indians leaped over board, and
got away very nimbly into the Woods; my Companions

22

Page 22
standing amazed at what had hapned, and the manner of
our surprizal. I asked them presently if any of them
could speak either French or English: but they answered,
No. Hereupon, as well as I could, I discoursed to some of
them, who were more intelligent than the rest, in Latin,
and by degrees came to understand their condition. These
were Spaniards who had been turned here ashoar by our
English party, who left them upon this Coast, lest by carrying
them nearer unto Panama, any of them should
make their escape, and discover our march towards that
City. They had me presently after I was taken into a small
Hut which they had built, covered with boughs, and made
there great shouts for joy, because they had taken us; designing
in their minds to use us very severely for coming
into those parts, and especially for taking and plundering
their Town of Santa Maria. But mean while the Captain
of those Spaniards was examining me, in came the poor
Spaniard that was come along with us, and reported how
kind I had been to him, and the rest of his Companions, by
saving their Lives from the cruelty of the Indians.

They are civilly
treated and
set at liberty.
The Captain having heard him, arose from his seat immediately
and embraced me, saying, that we Englishmen
were very friendly Enemies, and good people, but that the
Indians were very Rogues, and a treacherous Nation. Withal,
he desired me to sit down by him, and to eat part of such
Victuals as our Companions had left them when they were
turned ashoar. Then he told me, that for the kindness I
had shewed unto his Countrymen, he gave us all our Lives
and Liberties, which otherwise he would certainly have
taken from us. And though he could scarcely be perswaded
in his mind to spare the Indians lives, yet for my sake
he did pardon them all, and I should have them with me,
in case I could find them. Thus he bid me likewise take
my Canoa, and go in Gods name, saying withal, he wished
us as fortunate as we were generous. Hereupon I took my
leave of him, after some little stay, though he invited me
to tarry all night with him. I searched out, and at last

23

Page 23
found my Indians, who for fear had hid themselves in the
bushes adjoyning to the neighbouring woods, where they
lay concealed. Having found them, the Captain led me
very civilly down unto the Canoa, and bidding my Companions
and the Indians get in after me; as they at first
halled us ashoar, so now again they pushed us off to Sea, by
a suddain and strange vicissitude of fortune. All that night
it rained very hard, as was mentioned above; neither durst
we put any more ashoar at any place, it being all along
such, as by Mariners is commonly called an Iron Coast.

The next morning being come, we sailed, and padled, or

They overtake
the rest of the
Fleet.
rowed, till about ten of the clock. At which time we espied
a Canoa making towards us with all speed imaginable.
Being come up with us, and in view, it proved to be of
our own English Company, who mistaking our Canoa for
a Spanish Periagua, was coming in all hast to attack us. We
were infinitely gladded to meet them, and they presently
conducted us to the rest of our Company, who were at that
instant coming from a deep Bay, which lay behind a high
point of Rocks, where they had lain at Anchor all that
night and morning. We were all mutually rejoyced to see
one another again, they having given both me and my
Companions for lost.

CHAP. VI.

The Bucaniers prosecute their Voyage, till they
come within sight of
Panama. They take several
Barks and Prisoners by the way. Are descryed
by the
Spaniards before their arrival. They
order the
Indians to kill the Prisoners.

FRom the place where we rejoyned our English Forces,

They arrive at
Farol de Plantanos.

we all made our way towards a high hammock of
Land, as it appeared at a distance, but was nothing else

24

Page 24
then an Island seven Leagues distant from the Bay aforementioned.
On the highest part of this Island the Spaniards
keep a watch, or Look-out, (for so it is termed by the
Sea-men) for fear of Pyrates, or other Enemies. That
evening we arrived at the Island, and being landed, went up
a very steep place, till we came to a little Hut where the
watchman lodged. We took by surprizal the old man who
watched in the place, but hapned to see us not, till we were
got into his Plantane walk before the Lodge. He told us
in his examination, that we were not as yet descryed by the
Spaniards of Panama, or any others that he knew; which
relation of the old fellow much encouraged us to go forwards
with our design of surprizing that rich City. This
place, if I took its name rightly, is called Farol de Plantanos,
or in English, Plantane-watch.

The Bucaniers
take a Bark of
Panama.
Here, not long before it was dark that evening, a certain
Bark came to an anchor at the outward side of the Island,
which instantly was descryed by us. Hereupon, we
speedily Manned out two Canoas, who went under the
shoar and surprized the said Boat. Having examined the
persons that were on board, we found she had been absent
the space of eight days from Panama, and had landed Soldiers
at a point of Land not far distant from this Island,
with intention to fight and curb certain Indians and Negroes,
who had done much hurt in the Country thereabouts.
The Bark being taken, most of our men endeavoured
to get into her, but more especially those who had
the lesser Canoas. Thus there embarked thereon to the
number of one hundred thirty and seven of our company,
together with that Sea-Artist, and valiant Commander,
Captain Bartholomew Sharp. With him went also on board
Captain Cook, whom we mentioned at the beginning of this
History. The remaining part of that night we lay at the
Key of the said Island, expecting to prosecute our Voyage
the next day.

They take another
Bark.
Morning being come, I changed my Canoa and embarked
my self on another, which though it was something

25

Page 25
lesser than the former, yet was furnished with better company.
Departing from the Island, we rowed all day long
over shoal water, at the distance of about a League from
land, having sometimes not above four foot water, and
white ground. In the afternoon we descryed a Bark at
sea, and instantly gave her chace. But the Canoa wherein
was Captain Harris hapned to come up the first with her,
who after a sharp dispute took her. Being taken, we put
on board the said Bark thirty men. But the wind would
not suffer the other Bark in chacing to come up with us.
This pursuit of the Vessel did so far hinder us in our Voyage,
and divide us asunder, that night coming on presently
after, we lost one another, and could no longer keep in a body
together. Hereupon we laid our Canoa ashoar, to take
up our rest for that night, at the distance of two miles,
more or less, from high water mark, and about four Leagues
to Leeward of the Island of Chepillo, unto which place our
course was then directed.

The next morning, as soon as the water began to float

They arrive at
the Isle of
Chepillo.

us, we rowed away for the fore-mentioned Island Chepillo,
where by assignation our general Rendezvous was to be. In
our way as we went, we espyed another Bark under sail, as
we had done the day before. Capt. Coxons Canoa was now
the first that came up with this vessel. But a young breese
freshning at that instant, she got away from him after the
first onset, killing in the said Canoa one Mr. Bull, and wounding
two others. We presently conjectured that this Bark
would get before us unto Panama, and give intelligence of
our coming unto those of the Town; all which hapned as
we had foreseen. It was that day two of the clock in the
afternoon, before all our Canoas could come together, and
joyn one another as it was assigned at Chepillo. We took at
They take 14
prisoners.
that Island fourteen prisoners, between Negros and Mulatos;
also great store of Plantans, and good water, together with
two fat hogs. But now believing that ere this we had been
already descryed at Panama, by the Bark afore-mentioned,
we resolved among our selves to wast no time, but to hasten

26

Page 26
away from the said Island, to the intent we might at least
be able to surprize and take their Shipping, and by that
means make our selves masters of those Seas, in case we
could not get the Town, which now we judged almost im-
And a Periagua.

possible to be done. At Chepillo we took also a Periagua,
which we found at anchor before the Island, and presently
we put some men on board her. Our stay here was
only of few hours; so that about four of the clock in the
evening, which now was coming on, we rowed away from
thence, designing to reach Panama before the next morning;
unto which place we had now only seven Leagues to
go, it being no farther distant from Chepillo. But before
we departed from the said Island, it was judged convenient
by our Commanders, for certain reasons, which I could
not dive into, to rid their hands of the prisoners which we
They enjoyn
the
Indians to
kill the prisoners.

had taken. And hereupon orders were given unto our
Indians, who they knew would perform them very willingly,
to fight, or rather to murther and slay the said Prisoners
upon the shoar, and that in the view of the whole
Fleet. This they instantly went about to do, being glad of
this opportunity to revenge their hatred against their enemies,
though in cold blood. But the prisoners, although
they had no Arms wherewith to defend themselves, forced
their way through those barbarous Indians, in spight of their
Lances, Bows, and Arrows, and got into the Woods of the
Island, one only man of them being killed. We rowed
all night long, though many showers of rain ceased not
to fall.


27

Page 27

CHAP. VII.

They arrive within sight of Panama. Are encountred
by Three small men of War. They fight
them with only sixty eight men, and utterly defeat
them, taking two of the said Vessels. Description
of that bloody fight. They take several
Ships at the Isle of
Perico before Panama.

THe next morning, which was on April the 23. 1680.

They come
within fight of

Panama.
that day being dedicated unto St George, our Patron
of England, we came before Sun-rise within view of the
City of Panama, which maketh a pleasant shew unto the
Vessels that are at sea from off the shoar. Soon after we
saw also the Ships belonging to the said City, which lay at
Anchor at an Island called Perico, distant only two Leagues
from Panama. On the aforesaid Island are to be seen several
Store-houses which are built there, to receive the Goods
delivered out of the Ships. At that present there rid at
Anchor at Perico five great ships, and three pretty big
Barks, called Barcos de la Armadilla, or little men of War;
the word Armadilla signifying a Little Fleet. These had
Are descryed
by the
Armadilla.

been suddainly Manned out, with design to fight us, and
prevent any farther attempts we should make upon the
City, or Coasts of those Seas. As soon as they espied us,
they instantly weighed Anchor, and got under sail, coming
directly to meet us, whom they expected very shortly, according
to the intelligence they had received of our coming.
Our two Periaguas being heavy, could not row so
fast as we that were in the Canoas, and hence we were
got pretty far before them. In our five Canoas (for so
many we were now in company) we had only thirty six
men, and these but in a very unfit condition to fight, as

28

Page 28
being tyred with so much rowing, and so few in number,
And engage
with it.
in comparison of the enemy that came against us. They
sailed towards us directly before the wind, insomuch that
we feared lest they should run us down before it. Hereupon
we rowed up into the winds eye, as the Seamen term
it, and got close to windward of them. Mean while we
were doing this, our lesser Periagua came up with us, in
which were thirty two more of our Company. So that
Number of
their men that
fought.
we were in all sixty eight men that were engaged in the
fight of that day; the King himself being one of our number,
who was in the Periagua aforementioned. In the
vessel that was Admiral of these three small men of war,
were fourscore and six Biscayners, who have the repute of
being the best Mariners, and also the best Souldiers amongst
Strength of
the Armadilla.
the Spaniards. These were all Voluntiers, who came designedly
to shew their Valour, under the Command of
Don Jacinto de Barahona, who was High Admiral of those
Seas. In the second were seventy seven Negro's, who were
commanded by an old and stout Spaniard, Native of Andalusia
in Spain, named Don Francisco de Peralta. In the third
and last were sixty five Mestizos, or Mulato's, or Tawnymores,
Commanded by Don Diego de Carabaxal. So that in
all they made the number of two hundred twenty & eight
men. The Commanders had strict orders given them, and
their resolutions were to give quarters to none of the Pirats
or Bucaniers. But such bloody Commands as these
seldom or never do happen to prosper.

Beginning of
the Fight.
The Canoa of Captain Sawkins, and also that wherein I
was, were much to Leeward of the rest. So that the ship
of Don Diego de Carabaxal came between us two, and fired
presently on me to Windward, and on him to Leeward,
wounding with these broad sides, four men in his Canoa,
and one in that I was in. But he paid so dear for his passage
between us, that he was not very quick in coming about
again and making the same way. For we killed with our
first volly of shot, several of his men dead upon the decks.
Thus we also got to Windward, as the rest were before.

29

Page 29
At this time the Admiral of the Armadilla, or Little Fleet,
came up with us suddainly, scarce giving us time to charge,
and thinking to pass by us all with as little or less damage,
as the first of his Ships had done. But as it hapned, it fell
out much worse with him, for we were so fortunate, as to
kill the man at the Helm. So that his Ship ran into the
wind, and her Sails lay a back, as is usually said in Marinery.
By this means we had time to come all up under his
stern, and firing continually into his Vessel, we killed as
many as came to the Helm. Besides which slaughter, we
cut asunder his main sheet and brace with our shot. At
this time the third vessel, in which Captain Peralta was,
was coming up to the aid of their General. Hereupon
Captain Sawkins, who had changed his Canoa, and was gone
into the Periagua, left the Admiral to us four Canoas, (for
his own was quite disabled) and met the said Peralta. Between
him & Captain Sawkins the dispute, or fight, was very
hot, lying board on board together, and both giving and receiving
death unto each other as fast as they could charge.
In the mean while that we were thus engaged, the first
ship tackt about, and came up to relieve the Admiral. But
we perceiving that, and foreseeing how hard it would go
with us, if we should be beaten from the Admirals stern, determined
to prevent his design. Hereupon two of our
Canoas, to wit, Captain Springers and my own, stood off
to meet him. He made up directly towards the Admiral,
who stood upon the quarter deck, waving unto him with a
Handkerchief so to do But we engaged him so closely, in
One of them
put to slight.
the middle of his way, that had he not given us the Helm,
and made away from us, we had certainly been on board
him. We killed so many of the men, that the vessel had
scarce men enough left alive, or unwounded, to carry her
off. Yet the wind now blowing fresh, they made shift to
get away from us, and hereby save their lives.

The Vessel which was to relieve the Admiral being thus

They take the
Admiral.
put to slight, we came about again upon the Admiral, and
all together gave a loud hallow, which was answered by

30

Page 30
our men in the Periagua, though at a distance from us. At
that time we came so close under the stern of the Admiral,
that we wedged up the Rudder; and withal, killed
The Admiral
and chief Pilot
killed.
both the Admiral himself, and the chief Pilot of his ship;
so that now they were almost quite disabled and dis-heartned
likewise, seeing what a bloody Massacre we had made
among them with our shot. Hereupon, two thirds of their
men being killed, and many others wounded, they cryed
for Quarter, which had several times been offered unto
them, and as stoutly denyed until then. Captain Coxon
entred on board the Admiral, and took with him Captain
Captain Harris
shot.
Harris, who had been shot through both his Legs, as he
boldly adventured up along the side of the ship. This
vessel being thus taken, we put on board her also all the
rest of our wounded men, and instantly manned two of
our Canoas to go and aid Captain Sawkins, who now had
been three times beaten from on board Peralta, such valiant
defence had he made. And indeed, to give our Enemies
their due, no men in the world did ever act more bravely
than these Spaniards.

Another of
them taken.
Thus coming up close under Peralta's side, we gave him
a full volley of shot, and expected to have the like return
from him again. But on a suddain we saw his men blown
up that were abaft the Mast; some of them falling on the
deck, and others into the Sea. This disaster was no sooner
perceived by their valiant Captain Peralta, but he leaped
over board, and in spight of all our shot, got several of
them into the ship again; though he was much burnt in
both his hands himself. But as one misfortune seldom
cometh alone, mean while he was recovering these men to
reinforce his ship withal, and renew the fight, another Jar
of powder took fire forward, and blew up several others
upon the Fore-castle. Among this smoak, and under the
opportunity thereof, Captain Sawkins laid them on board,
and took the ship. Soon after they were taken, I went on
board Captain Peralta, to see what condition they were in.
And indeed, such a miserable sight I never saw in my life.

31

Page 31
For not one man there was found, but was either killed,
desperately wounded, or horribly burnt with Powder. Insomuch,
that their black skins were turned white in several
places, the powder having torn it from their flesh and
bones. Having compassionated their misery, I went after-
Horrible spectacle
of the
wounded.
wards on board the Admiral, to observe likewise the condition
of his Ship and men. Here I saw what did meerly
astonish me, and will scarcely be believed by others than
ourselves who saw it. There were found on board this ship
but twenty five men alive, whose number before the fight
had been four score and six, as was said above. So that threescore
and one, out of so small a number, were destroyed in
the Battle. But what is more, of these twenty five men,
only eight were able to bear Arms, all the rest being desperately
wounded, and by their wounds totally disabled
to make any resistance, or defend themselves. Their blood
ran down the decks in whole streams, and not scarce one
place in the ship was found that was free from blood.

Having possessed our selves of these two Armadilla ves-

They take the
Ships in the
Harbour.
sels, or Little men of War, Captain Sawkins asked the prisoners,
how many Men there might be on board the greatest
ship that we could see from thence, lying in the Harbour
of the Island of Perico above-mentioned, as also in
the others that were something smaller. Captain Peralta
hearing these questions, disswaded him as much as he could
from attempting them; saying, that in the biggest alone
there were Three hundred and fifty men, and that he would
find the rest too well provided for defence against his small
number. But one of his men, who lay a dying upon the
deck, contradicted him as he was speaking, and told Captain
Sawkins, there was not one man on board any of those
ships that werein view; for they had all been taken out of
them to fight us in these three vessels called the Armadilla,
or Little Fleet. Unto this relation we gave credit, as proceeding
from a dying man; and steering our course unto the
Island, we went on board them, and found, as he had said,
not one person there. The biggest ship of these, which

32

Page 32
was called La Santissima Trinidad, or the Blessed Trinity,
they had set on fire, made a hole in her, and loosened her
fore-sail. But we quenched the fire with all speed, and
stopt the leak. This being done, we put our wounded
men on board her, and thus constituted her for that present
to be our Hospital.

What men they
lost in the
fight.
Having surveyed our own loss and damages, we found
that eighteen of our men had been killed in the fight, and
twenty two were wounded. These three Captains against
whom we fought, were esteemed by the Spaniards to be
the valiantest in all the South Seas. Neither was this reputation
undeservedly conferred upon them, as may easily
be inferred from the relation we have given of this bloody
Engagement. As the third ship was running away from
the fight, she met with two more that were coming out to
their assistance; but withal, gave them so little encouragement,
that they returned back, and dared not engage us.
We began the Fight about half an hour after Sun-rise, and
by noon had finished the Battle, and quite overcome them.
Capt. Peralta, mean while he was our Prisoner, would often
break out into admirations of our Valour, and say, surely,
We Englishmen were the valiantest men in the whole world, who
designed always to fight open, whilst all other Nations invented
all the ways imaginable to barricade themselves, and fight
as close as they could.
And yet not withstanding, we killed
more of our Enemies than they of us.

Captain Harris
dyeth.
Two days after our Engagement, we buryed Captain
Peter Harris, a brave and stout Souldier, and a valiant Englishman,
born in the County of Kent; whose death we very
much lamented. He dyed of the wounds he received
in the Battel, and besides him, only one man more; all the
rest of our wounded men recovered. Being now come
before Panama, I here enquired of Don Francisco de Peralta,
our Prisoner, many things concerning the state and condition
of this City, and the Neighbouring Country; and he
satisfied me in manner following.


33

Page 33

CHAP. VIII.

Description of the State and Condition of Panama,
and the parts adjacent. What Vessels they took
while they blocked up the said Port. Captain

Coxon with seventy more returneth home. Sawkins
is chosen in chief.

THe famous City of Panama is situate in the latitude

Present state of
Panama.
of nine degrees North. It standeth in a deep Bay,
belonging to the South Sea. It is in form round, excepting
only that part where it runs along the Sea-side. Formerly
it stood four miles more Easterly, when it was taken
by Sir Henry Morgan, as is related in the History of
the Bucaniers. But by him then being burnt, and three
times more since that time by casualty, they removed it
to the place where it now standeth. Yet notwithstanding,
some poor people there are still inhabiting at the old Town,
and the Cathedral Church is still kept there, the beautiful
building whereof maketh a fair shew at a distance, like unto
that of St. Pauls at London. This new City, of which I
now speak, is much bigger than the old one was, and is
built for the most part of brick, the rest being built of stone,
and tiled. As for the Churches belonging thereunto, they
are not as yet finished. These are eight in number, whereof
the chiefest is called Santa Maria. The extent of the
City comprehendeth better than a mile and a half in length,
and above a mile in breadth. The Houses for the most
part are three stories in heighth. It is well walled round
about, with two Gates belonging thereunto, excepting only
where a Creek cometh into the City, the which at highwater
letteth in Barks, to furnish the Inhabitants with all
sorts of Provisions and other Necessaries. Here are always

34

Page 34
Three hundred of the Kings Souldiers to Garrison the
City; besides which number, their Militia of all colours,
are one thousand one hundred. But at the time that we
arrived there, most of their Souldiers were out of Town;
insomuch, that our coming put the rest into great consternation,
they having had but one nights notice of our being
in those Seas. Hence we were induced to believe, that
had we gone ashoar, instead of fighting their ships, we had
certainly rendred our selves masters of the place; especially
considering, that all their chief men were on board the
Admiral; I mean, such as were undoubtedly the best Souldiers.
Round about the City, for the space of seven Leagues,
more or less, all the adjacent Country is Savana, as they
call it in the Spanish Language, that is to say, plain and
level ground, as smooth as a sheet; for this is the signification
of the word Savana. Only here and there is to be
seen a small spot of woody Land; and every where this
level ground is full of Vacadas, or Beef Stantions, where
whole droves of Cows and Oxen are kept, which serve as
well as so many Look-outs, or Watch-Towers, to descry if
an Enemy is approaching by land. The ground whereon
the City standeth, is very damp and moist, which rendreth
the place but of bad repute for the concern of health. The
water is also very full of worms, and these are much prejudicial
to shipping; which is the cause that the Kings Ships lye
always at Lima, the Capital City of Peru, unless when they
come down to Panama to bring the Kings Plate; which is
only at such times, as the Fleet of Galeones cometh from
Old Spain to fetch and convey it thither. Here in one night
after our arrival, we found Worms of three quarters of an
inch in length, both in our Bed-cloaths and other Apparel.

Number of
ships taken before

Panama.
At the Island of Perico above-mentioned, we seized in
all five ships. Of these, the first and biggest was named,
as was said before, the Trinidad, and was a great ship, of the
Note, in this
ship they came
home.
burthen of four hundred Tuns. Her lading consisted of
Wine, Sugar, Sweet-meats, (whereof the Spaniards in those

35

Page 35
hot Countreys make infinite use) Skins, and Soap. The
second ship was of about Three hundred Tuns burthen,
and not above half laded with bars of Iron, which is one
of the richest Commodities that are brought into the South
Sea. This vessel we burned with the lading in her, because
the Spaniards pretended not to want that Commodity, and
therefore would not redeem it. The third was laden with
Sugar, being of the burthen of one hundred and fourscore
Tuns, more or less. This vessel was given to be under the
Command of Captain Cook. The fourth was an old ship
of sixty Tuns burthen, which was laden with flower of
Meal. This ship we likewise burnt with her lading; esteeming
both bottom and Cargo, at that time, to be useless unto
us. The fifth was a ship of Fifty Tuns, the which, with a
Periagua, Captain Coxon took along with him when he left
us.

Within two or three days after our arrival at Panama,

Captain Coxon
mutineth,
and returneth
home.
Captain Coxon being much dissatisfied with some reflections
which had been made upon him by our company, determined
to leave us, and return back to our ships in the Northern
Seas, by the same way he came thither. Unto this
effect, he perswaded several of our company, who sided
most with him, and had had the chiefest hand in his Election,
to fall off from us, and bear him company in his journey,
or march over-land. The main cause of those reflexions,
was the backwardness in the last Engagement
with the Armadilla; concerning which point, some sticked
not to defame, or brand him, with the note of Cowardize.
He drew off with him, to the number of threescore
and ten of our men, who all returned back with him in
the Ship and Periagua above-mentioned, towards the mouth
of the River of Santa Maria. In his company also went
back the Indian King, Captain Antonio, and Don Andræas,
who being old, desired to be excused from staying any
longer with us. However, the King desired we would not
be less vigourous in annoying their enemy and ours, the
Spaniards, than if he were personally present with us.

36

Page 36
And to the intent we might see how faithfully he did intend
to deal with us, he at the same time recommended
Captain Sawkins
chosen.
both his Son and Nephew unto the care of Captain Sawkins,
who was now our newly chosen General, or Commander
in chief, in the absence of Captain Sharp. The two
Armadilla Ships which we took in the Engagement we
burnt also, saving no other thing of them both, but their
Rigging, and Sails. With them also we burnt a small Bark,
which came into the Port laden with Fowls and Poultry.

All their Forces
joyn them.
On Sunday, which was April the 25th, Captain Sharp
with his Bark and Company came in and joyned us again.
His absence was occasioned by want of water, which forced
A Bark taken.
him to bear up to the Kings Islands Being there, he found
a new Bark, which he pretently took, and burnt his old one.
This vessel did sail excellently well. Within a day or two
after the arrival of Captain Sharp, came in likewise the
people of Captain Harris, who were still absent. These
Another Bark
taken.
had also taken another Bark, and cut down the Masts of their
old one by the board, and thus without Masts or Sails
turned away the Prisoners they had taken in her. The
A third Bark
taken.
next day we took in like manner another Bark, which arrived
from Nata, being laden with Fowls, as before. In this
Bark we turned away all the meanest of the Prisoners we
had on board us.

They go to the
Isle of
Tavoga
Having continued before Panama for the space of ten
days, being employed in the affairs afore-mentioned, on
May the second we weighed from the Island of Perico, and
stood off to another Island, distant two Leagues farther
from thence, called Tavoga. On this Island standeth a
Town which beareth the same name, and consisteth of a
hundred houses, more or less. The people of the Town
were all fled, seeing our vessels to arrive. Mean while we
were here, some of our men being drunk on shoar, hapned
to set fire unto one of the Houses, the which consumed
twelve houses more before any could get ashoar to quench
it. Unto this Island came several Spanish Merchants from

37

Page 37
Panama, and sold us what Commodities we needed, buying
also of us much of the goods we had taken in their own
vessels. They gave us likewise two hundred pieces of
Eight for each Negro we could spare them of such as were
our prisoners. From this Island we could easily see all the
Vessels that went out, or came into the Port of Panama;
and here we took likewise several Barks that were laden
with Fowls.

Eight days after our arrival at Tavoga, we took a ship

A good Prize
taken.
that was coming from Truxillo, and bound for Panama. In
this vessel we found two thousand Jars of Wine, fifty Jars
of Gunpowder, and fifty one thousand pieces of Eight.
This money had been sent from that City, to pay the Soldiers
belonging to the Garison of Panama. From the said
Prize we had information given us, that there was another
ship coming from Lima with one hundred thousand pieces
of Eight more; which ship was to fail ten or twelve days
after them, and which they said could not be long before she
arrived at Panama. Within two days after this intelligence,
Another Prize.
we took also another ship laden with Flower from Truxillo,
belonging unto certain Indians, Inhabitants of the same
place, or thereabouts. This Prize confirmed what the first
had told us of that rich ship, and said, as the others had
done before, that she would be there in the space of eight
or ten days.

Mean while we lay at Tavoga, the President, that is to

A message
from the President
of
Panama.

say, the Governour of Panama, sent a Message by some
Merchants unto us, to know what we came for into those
parts? Unto this Message Captain Sawkins made answer,
That we came to assist the King of Darien, who was the true
The answer
unto it.
Lord of
Panama and all the Country thereabouts. And that
since we were come so far, it was no reason but that we should
have some satisfaction. So that if he pleased to send us five
hundred pieces of Eight for each man, and one thousand for
each Commander, and not any farther to annoy the
Indians, but
suffer them to use their own power and liberty, as became the
true and natural Lords of the Country, that then we would


38

Page 38
desist from all farther Hostilities, and go away peaceably; otherwise
that we should stay there, and get what we could, causing
unto them what damage was possible.
By the Merchants also
that went and came to Panama, we understood, there lived
then as Bishop of Panama, one who had been formerly Bishop
of Santa Martha, and who was Prisoner unto Captain
Sawkins, when he took the said place about four or five
years past. The Captain having received this intelligence,
sent two loaves of Sugar unto the Bishop as a present. On
the next day the Merchant who carryed them, returning to
Tavoga, brought unto the Captain a golden ring for a retaliation
of said present. And withal, he brought a message
to Captain Sawkins from the President above-mentioned,
to know farther of him, since we were Englishmen,
from whom we had our Commission, and to whom he ought to
complain for the damages we had already done them?
Unto
this Message Captain Sawkins sent back for an answer, That
as yet all his company were not come together; but that when
they were come up, we would come and visit him at
Panama, and
bring our Commissions on the muzzles of our Guns, at which
time he should read them as plain as the flame of Gunpowder
could make them.

They go to the
Isle of
Otoque.
At this Island of Tavoga, Captain Sawkins would fain
have stayed longer, to wait for the rich Ship above-mentioned,
that was coming from Peru; but our men were so
importunate for fresh Victuals, that no reason could rule
them, nor their own interest perswade them to any thing
that might conduce unto this purpose. Hereupon, on
May the 15th we weighed Anchor, and sailed from thence
unto the Island of Otoque. Being arrived there, we lay by
it, mean while our Boat went ashoar, and fetcht off Fowls,
and Hogs, and other things necessary for sustenance. Here
at Otoque I finished a draught, comprehending from point
Garachine, unto the Bay of Panama, &c. Of this I may
dare to affirm, that it is in general more correct and true,
than any the Spaniards have themselves. For which cause
I have here inserted it, for the satisfaction of those that are
curious in such things.


39

Page 39

From Otoque we sailed to the Island of Cayboa, which is

And thence to
Cayboa.
a place very famous for the fishery of Pearl thereabouts;
and is at the distance of eight Leagues from another place
called Puebla Nueba, on the Main. In our way to this
Island, we lost two of our Barks, the one whereof had
fifteen men in her, and the other seven. Being arrived,
we cast anchor at the said Island.


40

Page 40
[ILLUSTRATION]

41

Page 41

CHAP. IX.

Captain Sawkins, chief Commander of the Bucaniers,
is killed before Puebla Nueba. They are
repulsed from the said place. Captain
Sharp
chosen to be their Leader. Many more of their
company leave them, and return home over land.

MEan while we lay at Anchor before Cayboa, our two

They land on
the Continent.
chiefest Commanders, Captain Sawkins and Captain
Sharp, taking with them to the number of threescore men,
more or less, went in the Ship of Captain Cook unto the
mouth of the River where Puebla Nueba is situated. The
day of this action, as I find it quoted in my Journal, was
May 22. 1680. When they came unto the Rivers mouth,
they put themselves into Canoas, and were piloted up the
River towards the Town by a Negroe, who was one of our
Prisoners. I was chosen to be concerned in this action, but
hapned not to land, being commanded to remain in Captain
Cooks ship, while they went up to assault the Town.
But here at Puebla Nueba, the Inhabitants were too well
provided for the reception of our party. For at the distance
of a mile below the Town, they had cut down great
Trees, and laid them cross the River, with design to hinder
the ascent of any Boats. In like manner on shoar before
the Town it self, they had raised three strong breast-works,
and made other things for their defence. Here therefore
Captain Sawkins running up to the breast-works, at the head
of a few men, was killed; a man who was as valiant and
Captain Sawkins
killed.
couragious as any could be, and likewise next unto Captain
Sharp, the best beloved of all our company, or the most part
thereof. Neither was this love undeserved by him; for
we ought justly to attribute unto him the greatest honour

42

Page 42
we gained in our Engagement before Panama, with the Spanish
Armadilla, or Little Fleet. Especially, considering that
as hath been said above, Captain Sharp was by accident absent
at the time of that great and bloody fight.

Some account
of the River of

Puebla Nueba.
We that remained behind on board the Ship of Captain
Cook, carryed her within the mouth of the River of Puebla
Nueba,
and entred close by the East shoar, which here is
crowned with a round hill. Here within two stones cast
of shoar, we had four fathom water. Within the Point
openeth a very fine and large River, which falleth from a
sandy Bay, at a small distance from thence. But as we were
getting in, being strangers unto the place, we unwittingly
ran our ship on ground, nigh unto a Rock which lyeth on
the westward shoar: for the true Channel of the said River
is nearer to the East than West shoar. With Captain
Sawkins, in the unfortunate assault of this place, there dyed
two men more, and three were wounded in the Retreat,
which they performed unto the Canoas in pretty good or-
Vessels taken
and destroyed.
der. In their way down the River, Captain Sharp took a
Ship, whose lading consisted of Indigo, Otto, Manteca, or
Butter and Pitch; and likewise burnt two vessels more, as
being of no value. With this he returned on board our
ships, being much troubled in his mind, and grieved for the
loss of so bold and brave a partner in his Adventures, as
Sawkins had constantly shewed himself to be. His death
was much lamented, and occasioned another party of our
men to mutiny, and leave us returning over land, as Captain
Coxon and his company had done before.

Sharp chosen.
Three days after the death of Captain Sawkins, Captain
Sharp, who was now Commander in chief, gave the ship
which he had taken in the River of Puebla Nueba, and
which was of the burthen of one hundred Tuns, more or
less, unto Captain Cook, to Command and Sail in. Ordering
withal, that the old vessel which he had, should go with
those men that designed to leave us; their Mutiny, and our
Distraction being now grown very high. Hereupon Captain
Sharp coming on board La Trinidad, the greatest of

43

Page 43
our ships, asked our men in full Councel, who of them were
willing to go or stay, and prosecute the design Captain
Sawkins had undertaken, which was to remain in the South
Sea, and there to make a compleat Voyage; after which,
he intended to go home round about America, through the
Straights of Magallanes. He added withal, that he did not
as yet fear, or doubt in the least, but to make each man who
should stay with him, worth one thousand pound, by the
fruits he hoped to reap of that Voyage. All those who
had remained after the departure of Captain Coxon, for love
of Captain Sawkins, and only to be in his company, and
under his Conduct, thinking thereby to make their fortunes,
would stay no longer, but pressed to depart. Among this
number I acknowledge my self to have been one, as being
Many leave
them.
totally desirous in my mind, to quit those hazardous adventures,
and return homewards in company of those who
were now going to leave us. Yet being much afraid and
averse to trust my self among wild Indians any farther, I
chose rather to stay, though unwilling, and venture on that
long and dangerous Voyage. Besides which danger of the
Indians, I considered that the Rains were now already up,
and it would be hard passing so many Gullies, which of necessity
would then be full of water, and consequently create
more than one single peril unto the undertakers of that
Journey. Yet notwithstanding, sixty three men of our
company were resolved to encounter all these hardships, and
to depart from us. Hereunto they took their leave of us,
and returned homewards, taking with them the Indian
Kings Son, and the rest of the Indians for their guides overland.
They had, as was said above, the ship wherein Captain
Cook sailed to carry them: and out of our Provision as
much as would serve for treble their number.

Thus on the last day of May they departed, leaving us

A small account
of the
Isle of
Cayboa.
employed about taking in water, and cutting down wood,
at the Island of Cayboa afore-mentioned, where this mutiny
hapned. Here we caught very good Tortoise, and Red
Deer. We killed also Alligators of a very large size, some

44

Page 44
of them being above twenty foot in length. But we could
not find but that they were very fearful of a Man, and
would fly from us very hastily when we hunted them.
This Island lyeth S. S. E. from the mouth of the River above-mentioned.
On the South-East side of the Island is
a shoal, or spit of sand, which stretcheth it self the space
of a quarter of a League into the Sea. Here therefore just
within this shoal, we anchored in the depth of fourteen fathom
water. The Island on this side thereof maketh two
great Bays, in the first of which we watered, at a certain
pond not distant above the cast of a stone up from the Bay.
In this pond, as I was washing my self, and standing under
a Manzanilla-tree, a small shower of rain hapned to fall on
the tree, and from thence dropped on my skin. These
drops caused me to break out all over my body into red
spots, of which I was not well for the space of a week af-
Huge Oysters.
ter. Here I eat very large Oysters, the biggest that ever
I eat in my life; insomuch, that I was forced to cut them
into four pieces; each quarter of them being a good mouthful.

Three days after the departure of the Mutineers, Captain
Sharp ordered us to burn the ship that hitherto had sailed
in, only out of design to make use of the Iron-work
belonging to said Vessel. Withal, we put all the Flour
that was her lading into the last Prize, taken in the River

They mutiny against
Captain

Cook.
of Puebla Nova; and Captain Cook, as was said before, was
ordered to command her. But the men belonging to his
company would not sail any longer under his command.
Hereupon, he quitted his vessel and came on board our Admiral,
the great Ship above-mentioned, called La Trinidad,
Cox put in his
place.
determining to rule over such unruly company no longer.
In his place was put one, whose name was John Cox, an Inhabitant
of New-England, who forced Kindred, as was
thought, upon Captain Sharp, out of old acquaintance, in
this conjuncture of time, only to advance himself. Thus
he was made, as it were, Vice-Admiral unto Captain Sharp.
The next day three of our Prisoners, viz. an Indian, who

45

Page 45
was Captain of a ship, and two Mulatos, ran away from us,
and made their escape.

After this it was thought convenient to send Captain

Captain Peralta
removed.
Peralta prisoner in the Admiral, on board the Ship of Mr.
Cox. This was done, to the intent he might not hinder the
endeavours of Captain Juan, who was Commander of the
Money-ship we took, as was mentioned at the Island of Tavoga.
For this man had now promised to do great things
for us, by Piloting and conducting us unto several places of
great Riches. But more especially to Guayaquil, where he
said we might lay down our Silver, and lade our vessels
with Gold. This design was undertaken by Captain Sawkins,
and had not the head-strongness of his men brought
him to the Island of Cayboa, where he lost his life, he had
certainly effected it before now. That night we had such
Great thunder.
thunder and lightning, as I never had heard before in all my
life. Our Prisoners told us, that in these parts it very often
causeth great damages both by Sea and Land. And
my opinion gave me to believe, that our Main-mast received
some damage in this occasion. The rainy season
being now entred, the wind for the most part was at N. W.
though not without some calms.

CHAP. X.

They depart from the Island of Cayboa unto the
Isle of
Gorgona, where they Careen their Vessels.
Description of this Isle. They resolve to
go and plunder
Arica, leaving their design of
Guayaquil.

HAving got in all things necessary for Navigation, we

They set sail
from
Cayboa.
were now in a readiness to depart, on Sunday June
the 6th 1680. That day we had some rain fell, which

46

Page 46
now was very frequent in all places. About five of the
clock in the evening we set sail from the Island of Cayboa,
with a small breez, the wind being at S. S. W. Our course
was E. S. by E. and S. E. having all night a very small, or
little wind. The same calmness of weather continued all
the next day; insomuch, that we lay and drove only as the
current horsed us to N. W.

Little better then a calm we had also the third day of our
Navigation. Mean while a current drove us to the Westward.
About Sun-rising we descryed Quicara, which at
that time bore N.W. by W. from us; at the distance of five
Leagues, more or less. With the rising of the Sun an easie
gale of wind sprung up, so that at noon we had altered our
bearing, which was then N. by E. being six Leagues distant,
and appearing thus, as is underneath demonstrated.

[ILLUSTRATION]

QUICARA

Lat. 7 Deg. 40. N.

Quicara described.

These are two several Islands, whereof the least is to the
Southward of the other. The Land is a low table Land:
these Islands being more than three Leagues in length.
About six of the clock that evening, we were nigh ten
Leagues distant W.S.W. from them. Much like unto the
former weather we had the fourth day of our Sailing, with
little wind in the forenoon, and rather less than more in the
afternoon. I judged about the middle of the day, we were
at the distance of twenty Leagues S. S. W. from the said
Islands.

Thursday June the Tenth, we had very small and variable
winds. This day I reckoned that we had made hitherto


47

Page 47
a S. by E. way, and a S. by W. from our departure; being
driven by a current, according to the observation I
made, into the Latitude of six degrees and thirty minutes.

This day we saw much Tortoise sloating upon the Sea.

Much Tortoise
and other fish.
Hereupon, we hoisted out our Boat, and came to one of
them, who offered not to stir until she was struck; and
even then not to sink to the bottom, but rather to swim
away. The sea hereabouts is very full of several sorts of
Fish, as Dolphins, Bonitos, Albicores, Mullets, and Old Wives,
&c.
which came swimming about our ship in whole shoals.
The next day, which was Friday, we had likewise very little
wind; which was no more than we had all Thursday
night, with some showers of rain. That day we had an
observation, which was six deg. N. latitude. In the evening
a fresh wind came up at S. W. our course being S. S. E.
On Saturday we had in like manner, about seven in the
morning, a fresh breeze at South. So we stood W. S. W.
with cloudy weather, and several showers of rain. This
day our Spanish prisoners informed us, we must not expect
Inconstancy of
winds.
any setled wind, until we came within the Latitude of three
degrees. For all along the Western shoar of these seas, there
is little wind; which is the cause that those ships that go
from Acapulco unto the Islands called de las Philippinas, do
How the Spaniards
go to
Philippinas.
coast along the shoar of California, until they get into the
heighth of forty five degrees; yea sometimes of fifty degrees
latitude. As the wind varyed, so we tacked several
times, thereby to make the best of our way that was possible
to the Southward.

As our Prisoners had informed us, so we found it by ex-

Great calmes.
perience. For on the next day, which was Sunday June
the 13th, we had very little wind, and most commonly
none, for the space of twenty four hours. That day we
tryed the current of the sea, and found it very strong to the
Eastward. The same day we had much rain, and in the
afternoon a small breeze at West, and West South West, but
mostly at West. Yet notwithstanding all this calmness of
weather, the next day in the morning very early, by a suddain

48

Page 48
gale of wind which arose, we made shift to split our
main top-sail. We had all the night before, and that day,
continual and incessant showers of rain, and made a S. W.
and by south way; seeing all along as we went a multitude
of Dolphins, Bonitos and several other sorts of fish floating
upon those Seas, whereof in the afternoon we caught many,
the weather being now changed from stormy to calm
They take fish.
again; insomuch that we could fish as we sailed along, or
rather as we lay tumbling in the calm.

More calms.
Tuesday June the 15th, the morning continued calm,
as the day before; and this day also we saw multitudes of
fish of several sorts, whereof we caught some for our Table
as we were wont to do. By an observation which was
made this day, we found our selves to be now in the lati-
Their course
and design.
tude of four degrees and twenty one minutes. At this
time the course of our Navigation, and our whole design
was to go and careen our Vessels at the Islands commonly
called by the Spaniards, de los Galapagos, that is to say, of
the Tortoises, being so denominated from the infinite number
of those Animals swarming and breeding thereabouts.
These Islands are situated under the Æquinoctial Line, at
the distance of a hundred Leagues more or less from the
main Continent of America, in the South Sea. In the afternoon
of this day we had a small breeze to push us forwards.

Great rains all
this Voyage.
June the 16th being Wednesday, we made our way this
day, and for the four and twenty hours last past, E.S. E. with
much rain, which ceased not to fall, as in all this Voyage,
fince our departure from Cayboa. This day likewise we
caught several Dolphins, and other sorts of fish. But in the
evening we had again a fresh breeze at S. by W. our course
being, as was just now said, E. S. E.

They see Land.
The next day, which was June the 17th, about five in the
morning we descryed Land, which appeared all along to
be very low, and likewise full of Creeks and Bays. We
instantly asked our Pilot what Land that was before us?
But he replyed, he knew it not. Hereupon, being doubtful

49

Page 49
of our condition, we called Mr. Cox on board us, who
brought Captain Peralta with him. This Gentleman being
asked, presently told us, the Land we saw was the Land
of Barbacoa, being almost a wild Country all over. Withal,
he informed us, that to Leeward of us, at the distance of
ten Leagues, or thereabouts, did lye an Island called by the
The Island of
Gorgona, and
its qualities.
name of Gorgona; the which Island, he said, the Spaniards
did shun, and very seldom come nigh unto, by reason of the
incessant and continual rains there falling; scarce one day
in the year being dry at that place. Captain Sharp having
heard this information of Captain Peralta, judged the said
Island might be the fittest place for our company to careen
They resolve to
careen there.
at; considering, that if the Spaniards did not frequent it,
we might in all probability lye there undiscryed, and our
Enemies the Spaniards, in the mean time might think, that
we were gone out of those Seas. At this time it was, that
I seriously repented my staying in the South Seas, and that
I did not return homewards in company of them that went
before us. For I knew, and could easily perceive, that by
these delays the Spaniards would gain time, and be able to
send advice of our coming to every Port all along the Coast,
so that we should be prevented in all, or most of our attempts
and designs wheresoever we came. But those of
our company, who had got money by the former Prizes of
this Voyage, overswayed the others who had lost all their
booty at gaming. Thus we bore away for the Island aforesaid
of Gorgona, and at the distance of six Leagues and an
half, at S.W. I observed it to make the appearance following.


50

Page 50
[ILLUSTRATION]

GORGONA.

Lat. 1. 00. N.

A place where
Gold is gathered.

On the main Land over against this Island of Gorgona,
we were told by our prisoners, that up a great Laguna, or
Lake, is seated an Indian Town, where they have great quantity
of sand grains of Gold. Moreover, that five days
journey up a River, belonging to the said Laguna, do dwell
four Spanish Superintendents, who have each of them the
charge of overseeing fifty or sixty Indians, who are employed
in gathering that Gold which slippeth from the
chief Collectors, or finders thereof These are at least threescore
and ten, or fourscore Spaniards, with a great number
of slaves belonging unto them, who dwell higher up then
these four Superintendents, at the distance of twenty five
or thirty days Journey on the said River. That once every
year, at a certain season, there cometh a vessel from Lima,
the Capital City of Peru, to fetch the Gold that here is
gathered; and withal, to bring unto these people such Necessaries
as they want. By Land it is nothing less than six
weeks travel from thence to Lima.

The main Land to windward of this Island is very low,
and full of Rivers. All along the Coast it raineth most
desperately. The Island is distant from the Continent
only the space of four Leagues. Mean while we lay at it,
I took the whole circumference thereof, which is according
to what is here underneath described.


51

Page 51
[ILLUSTRATION]

52

Page 52

Captain Sharp gave unto this Island the name of Sharps
Isle,
by reason we careened at this place. We anchored on
the South side of the Island, at the mouth of a very fine
River, which there disgorgeth it self into the Sea. There
belong unto this Island about thirty Rivers and Rivolets,
all which fall from the Rocks on the several sides of the
Island. The whole circumference thereof is about three
Leagues and an half round, being all high and mountainnous
land, excepting only on that side where we cast Anchor.
Here therefore we moor'd our ship in the depth of
eighteen or twenty fathom water, and began to unrig the

They unrig
their vessel.
vessel. But we were four or five days space before we could
get our Sails dry, so as to be able to take them from the
yards, there falling a shower of rain almost every hour of
the day and night. The main Land to the East of the
Island, and so stretching Northward, is extream high and
towering, and withal perpetually clouded, excepting only
at the rising of the Sun, at which time the tops of those
hills are clear. From the South side of this Island where
we Ankored, as was said above, we could see the low-land
of the main; at least a point thereof which lyeth nearest
unto the Island. The appearance it maketh, is as it were
of Trees growing out of the water.

Friday July the second, as we were heaving down our
ship, our Main-mast hapned to crack. Hereupon our Carpenters
were constrained to cut out large fishes, and fish it,
as the usual terms of that art do name the thing.

A huge Snake.
On the next day after the mischance of our Main-mast,
we killed a Snake which had fourteen inches in circumference,
and was eleven foot in length, About the distance
of a League from this Island, runneth a ledge of Rocks,
over which the water continually breaketh; the ledge being
about two miles, more or less, in length. Had we anchor'd
but half a mile more Northerly, we had rid in much
smoother water; for here where we were, the wind came
in upon us in violent gusts. Mean while we were there,
from June the thirtieth, to July the third, we had dry weather,

53

Page 53
which was esteemed as a rarity by the Spaniards our
prisoners. And every day we saw Whales and Grampusses,
Whales and
Grampusse. at

Gorgona.
who would often come and drive under our ship. We sired
at them several times, but our Bullets rebounded from
their bodies. Our choice and best provisions here, were
Indian Conies, Monkeys, Snakes, Oysters, Cunks, Periwinkles,
and a few small Turtle, with some other sorts of good fish.
Here in like manner we caught a Sloath, a beast well deser-
A Sloath taken.

ving that name, given it by the Spaniards, by whom it is
called Pereza, from the Latin word Pigritia.

At this Island dyed Joseph e Gabriel, a Spaniard, born in

Death of a
Spanish prisoner.

Chile, who was to have been our Pilot unto Panama. He
was the same man who had stolen and married the Indian
Kings Daughter, as was mentioned above. He had all along
been very true and faithful unto us, in discovering several
Plots and Conspiracies of our prisoners, either to get
away or destroy us. His death was occasioned by a Calenture,
or Malignant Feaver, which killed him after three
days sickness, having lain two days senceless. During the
time of our stay at this Island, we lengthned our top-failyards,
and got up top gallant masts; we made two staysails,
and refitted our ship very well. But we wanted
Provisions extreamly, as having nothing considerable of any
sort, but flower and water. Being almost ready to depart,
Captain Sharp our Commander, gave us to understand, he
They change
resolution.
had changed his resolution concerning the design of going
to Guayaquil, for he thought it would be in vain to go thither,
considering, that in all this time we must of necessity
be described before now. Yet notwithstanding he himself
before had perswaded us to stay. Being very doubtful among
our selves what course we should take, a certain old
man, who had long time sailed among the Spaniards, told
us, he could carry us to a place called Arica. Unto which
Town, he said, all the Plate was brought down from Potosi,
They design for
Arica.
Chuquisaca, and several other places within the Land, where
it was digged out of the Mountains and Mines. And that
he doubted not, but that we might get there of purchase

54

Page 54
at least two thousand pound every man. For all the Plate
of the South Sea lay there as it were in store; being deposited
at the said place, until such time as the ships did
fetch it away. Being moved with these reasons, and having
deliberated thereupon, we resolved in the end to go
unto the said place. At this Island of Gorgona afore-mentioned,
we likewise took down our Round-house coach, and
all the high carved work belonging to the stern of the ship.
For when we took her from the Spaniards before Panama,
she was high as any Third-Rate ship in England.

CHAP. XI.

The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Gorgona,
with design to plunder Arica. They loose one another
by the way. They touch at the
Isle of Plate,
or Drakes Isle, where they meet again. Description
of this Isle. Some
Memoirs of Sir
Francis Drake. An account of this Voyage, and
the Coasts all along. They sail as far in a fortnight,
as the
Spaniards usually do in three
months.

They depart
from
Gorgona.
ON Sunday July the 25th, in the afternoon, all things
being now in a readiness for our departure, we set
sail, and stood away from the Island of Gorgona, or Sharps
Isle,
with a small breez which served us at N. W. But as
the Sun went down that day, so our breez dyed away by
degrees. Yet already we could begin to experiment, that
our ship sailed much better, since the taking down her
round house, and the other alterations which we made in
her.

The next day about two of the clock in the morning,


55

Page 55
we had a land breez to help us, which lasted for the space
of six hours, more or less. So that at noon we found our
selves to be five Leagues and a half distant to the South
West from Gorgona. This day the Spaniards our prisoners,
A deep Coast.
told us, in common discourse, that in most part of this lowland
Coast, they find threescore fathom water. In the afternoon
we had from land a very strong breez: mean
while we continued making short trips off and in. That
night we had much rain for the greatest part of the night,
which occasioned the next morning, being the third day of
our Navigation, to be very cloudy until ten of the clock.
About that hour it cleared up, and then we saw the Island
of Gorgona at E. N. E. being distant about twelve Leagues
more or less from us. We had the wind all this day at
S.W. where it continued, seldom varying above two points
of the Compass to the Westwards. Night being come, about
ten of the clock, Captain Sharp ordered me to speak
unto Captain Cox, and bid him go about and stand off
from the shoar, for he feared least Cox should come too
nigh unto it. But he replyed, he knew well, that he might
stand in until two of the clock. The next day very early
They loose one
another.
in the morning, we saw him not, the morning being cloudy
and stark calm. Yet notwithstanding at eight of the
clock it cleared up, and neither then could we see him.
From hence we concluded, and so it proved, that we had
lost him in the obscurity of the night, through his obstinacy
in standing in too long, and not coming about when we
spoke unto him. Thus our Admirals ship was left alone,
and we had not the company of Captain Cox any longer in
this Voyage, till we arrived at the Isle of Plate, where we
had the good fortune to find him again, as shall be mentioned
hereafter. The weather being clear this morning, we
could see Gorgona, at the distance of at least fifteen or sixteen
Leagues to the E. N. E. All this day it continued
calm, till about four in the afternoon, at which time we
had a W. S. W. wind, which continued to blow all that
night.


56

Page 56

Island del Gallo.

Thursday July the 29th 1680. This day the wind continued
pretty fresh all day long. About four in the afternoon
we came within sight of the Island del Gallo, which
I guessed to be nigh twenty eight Leagues distant from
that of Gorgona, the place of our departure S. W. It is
about nine Leagues distant to East from the Main. So that
the Island with the Main Land S. W. from it appeareth thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

GALLO.

Lat. 2. 12. N.

All this day the weather continued clear, and the wind
W. S. W.

The next day being July the 30th, the wind blew very
fresh and brisk; insomuch, that we were in some fear for
the heads of our low Masts, as being very sensible that they
were but weak. About three or four in the afternoon, we
saw another Island, six or seven Leagues distant from Gallo,

Isle of Gorgonilla.

called Gorgonilla. At E. by S. from us it made the appearance
which I have here adjoyned. All the Main-Land
hereabouts lyeth very low and flat, and is in very many
places overflown and drowned every high-water.

[ILLUSTRATION]

GORGONILLA.

On Saturday July the thirty first in the morning, the I-


57

Page 57
sland del Gallo, at E.N.E. being distant about eight Leagues,
gave us this appearance.

[ILLUSTRATION]

GALLO, Another Prospect thereof.

The point of Mangroves is a low and level point, running
out S. S. W. This day, and the night before it, we
lost by our computation three Leagues of our way. Which

They loose way.
I believe hapned, by reason we stood out too far from the
Land, as having stood off all night long.

August the first, which was Sunday, we had a very fresh
wind at W. S. W. This was joyned also with several small
showers of rain which fell that day. In the mean while
we got pretty well to windward with it, by making small
trips to and fro; which we performed most commonly, by
standing in three glasses, and as many out.

The next day, August the second in the morning, we came

Land of San
Tiago.
up unto the high-land of San Tiago, where beginneth the
high-land of this Coast. We kept at the distance of ten
Leagues from it, and making continual short trips, as was
mentioned before. The next day likewise we continued
to do the same. But the weather was cloudy, and for the
most part full of rain.

Wednesday August the fourth, we continued still turn-

Land of San
Matteo.
ing in the winds eye, as we had done for two days before.
This day in the afternoon we discovered three Hills at
E. N. E. of our ship. These Hills make the Land of San
Matteo,
which giveth this following appearance.


58

Page 58
[ILLUSTRATION]

San MATTEO.

Cape St. Francis.

All the Coast along hereabouts is high land. That evening
also we saw the Cape of San Francisco. At first this
Cape appeared like unto two several Islands. But two
hours after, at the distance of twelve Leagues, at S. by W.
it looked thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cape of San FRANCISCO.

Thursday August the fifth, we being then about the Cape,
it looked very like unto Beachy-head in England. It is full
of white Cliffs on all sides. The land turneth off here to
the Eastward of the South, and maketh a large and deep
Bay, the circumference whereof is full of pleasant Hills.
In the bite of the Bay are two high and rocky Islands, the
which represent exactly two ships with their Sails full. We
were now come out of the rainy Countreys, into a pleasant
and fair Region, where we had for the most part a
clear sky, and dry weather. Only now and then we could
here find a small mist, which soon would vanish away. In
the mean while, every night a great dew used to fall,
which supplied the defect of rain.

The two next days following, we continued plying to


59

Page 59
windward with fair weather, nothing else remarkable
hapning in them which might deserve any notice to be taken
thereof.

On Sunday August the eighth, we came close under a
wild and mountainous Country. This day likewise we saw
Cape Passao, at the distance of ten Leagues more or less

Cabo Passao.
to windward of us. Ever since we came on this side Mangrove
point,
we observed a windward Current did run all
along as we sailed. Under shoar the Land is full of white
Cliffs and Groves; lower towards the pitch of the Cape.

The next day we had both a fair day, and a fresh wind
to help us on our Voyage. We observed that Cape Passao
maketh three points, between which are two Bays. The
Leeward-most of the two, is of the length of three Leagues,
and the other of four. Adjoyning to the Bays is seen a
pleasant valley. Our prisoners informed us, that Northward
of these Capes live certain Indians, who sell Maiz,
and other Provisions to any ships that happen to come in
there. The Cape it self is a continued Cliff, covered with
several sorts of shrubs and low bushes. Under these Cliffs
lyeth a sandy Bay of the depth of forty feet. The Spaniards
say, that the wind is always here between the S.S.W.
and W.S.W. The Cape representeth with much likelyness
the brow of an Alligator or Cayman. At South Cape
Passao appeareth thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cape PASSAO.

Lat. 1. 30. S.

Tuesday August the Tenth. This morning the sky was
so thick and hasey, that we could not see the high-land;


60

Page 60
though it were just before us, and not altogether two
Leagues distant from us. But as soon as it cleared up, we
stood in towards the Land, until we came within a mile of
the shoar. Here having sounded, we found seven fathom
and a half water, under which was a light and clayey
ground. The Coast all along is very mountainous, and
likewise full of high and towring Cliffs. When we sounded,
the Tyde was almost at low-water. Here it ebbeth
and floweth nigh four fathom perpendicular. From this
Cape the land runneth along S. E. for the space of three or
four Leagues, with huge high - land Cliffs, like unto
those of Callis over against England. Being past this Cape,
high-land South from us, is Cape St. Lawrence.

Monte de
Christo.
August the 11th, we found our selves N. N. W. from
Monte de Christo, being a very high and round hill. From
thence to windward is seen a very pleasant Country, with
spots here and there of woody land; which causeth the
Country all over to look like so many enclosures of ripe
Corn fields. To Leeward of the said Hill, the Land is all
high and hilly, with white Cliffs at the sea-side. The
Coast runneth S. W. till it reacheth unto a point of Land,
within which is the Port of Manta, as it is called. This
Port of Manta
Port of Manta, is nothing else than a settlement of Spaniards
and Indians together, where ships that want Provisions
do call in, and are furnished with several necessaries.
About six or seven Leagues to windward of this Port is
Cape St. Lawrence, butting out into the Sea, being in form
like unto the top of a Church. Monte de Christo giveth
this appearance at Sea.


61

Page 61
[ILLUSTRATION]

Monte de CHRISTO.

Lat. 50. S.

The Cape riseth higher and higher from the Port of
Manta. As we sailed along we saw multitudes of Gram-

Water-Snakes
and Grampusses.

pusses every day; as also Water-Snakes of divers colours.
Both the Spaniards, and Indians too are very fearful of these
Snakes, as believing there is no cure for their bitings. At
the distance of eight Leagues, or thereabouts, to Leeward
of Cape St. Laurence, it appeareth thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cape St. LAURENCE.

Lat. 55. S.

This day before night we came within sight of Manta.
Here we saw the Houses of the Town belonging to the
Port, which were not above twenty or thirty Indian houses,
lying under the windward and the Mount. We were not
willing to be descryed by the Inhabitants of the said place,
and hereupon we stood off to sea again.

On Thursday August the 12th, in the morning, we saw
the Island of Plate at S. W. at the distance of five Leagues

Isle of Palte.
more or less. It appeared unto us to be an even land. Having
made this Island, we resolved to go thither and refit
our rigging, and get some Goats which there run wild up

62

Page 62
and down the Country. For as was said before, at this
time we had no other provision than flour and water.
The Island it self is indifferent high land, and off at sea,
looketh thus, as is here described.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isle of PLATE.

Lat. 2. 42. S.

But the high-land of Cape Passao, of which we have spo-

Cape Passao.
ken before, at the distance of fifteen Leagues to North,
giveth in several hamocks this appearance.

[ILLUSTRATION]

High-land of Cape PASSAO.

C. St. Lawrence.

The Land of Cape Lorenzo is all white Cliffs; the head
of the Cape running N. and S. This day several great
Whales came up to us, and dived under our ship. One of
these Whales followed our ship, from two in the afternoon
till dark night.

They find Captain
Cox,
whom they
had lost.
The next morning very early, about six of the clock,
we came under the aforesaid Isle of Plate, and here unexpectedly,
to our great joy, we found at anchor the ship of
Captain Cox, with his whole company, whom we had lost
at sea for the space of a whole fortnight before. We found
they had reached this Island, and had been there at an anchor
four days before us, being now just ready to depart
from thence. About seven we came to an anchor, and
then the other vessel sent us a live Tortoise, and a Goat, to
feast upon that day; telling us withal, of great store of
Tortoise to be found ashoar upon the Bays; and of much

63

Page 63
fish to be caught hereabouts. The Island is very steep on
Description of
the Isle of
Plate
all sides; insomuch, that there is no landing, but only on
the N. E. side thereof; where is a Gully, nigh unto which
we anchored in twelve fathom water. Here at the distance
of a furlong, or little more from the shoar, as you
go to land, you will see on the left side hill a Cross still
standing, being there erected in former times. No Trees
are to be found on the whole Island, but only low shrubs,
on which the Goats feed; which Cattle is here very numerous.
The shoar is bold and hard; neither is there any
water to be found upon it, excepting only on the S. W.
side of the Island, where likewise it cannot be come at, as
lying so much enclosed by the Rocks, and too great a Sea
hindring the approach unto it in boats.

This Island received it's name from Sir Francis Drake,

Sir Fr. Drake.
and his famous Actions. For here it is reported by tradition,
that he made the dividend, or sharing of that vast
quantity of Plate, which he took in the Armada of this
Sea, distributing it unto each man of his company by
whole bowles full. The Spaniards affirm unto this day,
he took at that time twelve score Tuns of Plate, and sixteen
Bowles of Coyned Money a man; his number being
then forty five men in all. Insomuch, that they were forced
to heave much of it over board, because his ship could
not carry it all. Hence was this Island called by the Spaniards
themselves the Isle of Plate, from this great Dividend,
and by us Drakes Isle.

All along as we sailed, we found the Spanish Pilots to be

Spanish Pilots
their ignorance.

very ignorant of the Coasts. But they plead thus much
for their ignorance, that the Merchants their employers,
either of Mexico, Lima, Panama, or other parts, will not
entrust one penny worth of Goods on that mans Vessel
that corketh her, for fear lest she should miscarry. Here
our Prisoners told us likewise, that in the time of Oliver
A ship with
money sent to
King
Charles
the Second.
Cromwel, or the Common-wealth of England, a certain
ship was fitted out of Lima, with seventy brass Guns, having
on board her no less then thirty Millions of Dollers,

64

Page 64
or pieces of Eight. All which vast sum of money was given
by the Merchants of Lima, and sent as a Present unto
our gracious King (or rather his Father) who now reigneth,
to supply him in his Exile and distress. But that this great
and rich ship was lost by keeping the shoar along in the
Bay of Manta above-mentioned, or thereabouts. What
truth there may be in this History, I cannot easily tell.
At least, it seemeth to me as scarce deserving any credit.

Their Pilot removed.

At this Island we took out of Mr. Cox's ship the old
Moor, (for of that Nation he was) who pretended he would
be our Pilot unto Arica. This was done, left we should
have the misfortune of loosing the company of Cox's vessel,
as we had done before, our ship being the biggest in
burthen, and having the greatest number of men. Captain
Peralta admired oftentimes that we were gotten so far to
windward in so little space of time; whereas they had been,
he said, many times three or four months in reaching to
this distance from our departure. But their long and tedious
Voyages, he added, were occasioned by their keeping
at too great a distance from the shoar. Moreover, he
told us, that had we gone unto the Islands of Galapagos, as
we were once determined to do, we had met in that Voyage
with many Calms, and such Currents, that many
ships have by them been lost, and never heard of to this
day. This Island of Plate is about two Leagues in length,
and very full of both deep and dangerous Bays, as also
such as we call Gully's in these parts. The circumference
and description of the said Island is exactly thus.


65

Page 65
[ILLUSTRATION]

66

Page 66

Great number
of Tortoises
and Goats.
We caught at this Island, and salted good number of
Goats and Tortoises. One man standing here on a little
Bay, in one day turned seventeen Tortoises; besides which
number our Musquito strikers brought us in several more.
Captain Sharp our Commander shewed himself very ingenious
in striking them, he performing it as well as the
Tortoise strikers themselves. For these creatures here are
so little fearful, that they offer not to sink from the fishermen,
but lye still until such time as they are struck. But
we experimented that the Tortoises on this side, were not
so large nor so sweet unto the tast, as those on the North
side of the Island. Of Goats we have taken, killed, and
salted above a hundred in a day, and that without any labour.
In the mean while we stayed here, we made a
square main top-sail yard. We cut also six foot of our
bolt-sprit, and three foot more of our head. Most of the
time that we remained here, we had hasey weather. Only
now and then the Sun would happen to break out, and
then to shine so hot, that it burnt the skin of the necks
of several of our men. As for me, my lips were burnt
in such manner, that they were not well in a whole week
after.


67

Page 67

CHAP. XII.

Captain Sharp and his company depart from the Isle
of
Plate, in prosecution of their Voyage towards
Arica. They take two Spanish Vessels by the
way, and learn intelligence from the enemy. Eight
of their company destroyed at the Isle of
Gallo.
Tediousness of this Voyage, and great hardship
they endured. Description of the Coast all along,
and their sailings.

HAving taken in at the Isle of Plate, what Provisions

They depart
from the Isle of

Plate.
and other Necessaries we could get, we set sail from
thence on Tuesday the 17th of August, 1680. in prosecution
of our Voyage and designs above-mentioned, to take
and plunder the vastly rich Town of Arica. This day we
sailed so well, and the same we did several others afterwards,
that we were forced to lye by several times, besides reifing
our top-sails, to keep our other ship company, least we
should loose her again.

The next morning about break of day, we found our

They outsail
the other Vessel.

selves to be at the distance of seven or eight Leagues to
the Westward of the Island from whence we departed,
standing W. by S. with a S. by W. wind. About noon that
day we had laid the land. After dinner the wind came at
S. S. W. at which time we were forced to stay more than
once for the other vessel belonging to our company.

On the following day we continued in like manner a
west course all the day long. Sometimes this day the
wind would change, but then in a quarter of an hour it
would return to S. S. W. again as before. Hereabouts
where we now were, we observed great riplings of the Sea.


68

Page 68

August the twentieth, yesterday in the afternoon about
six of the clock, we stood in S. E. But all night and all
this day, we had very small winds. We found still that

They still gain
of her.
we gained very much of the small ship, which did not a
little both perplex and hinder us in our course.

The next day likewise we stood in S. E. by S. though
with very little wind, which sometimes varyed, as was mentioned
above. That day I finished two Quadrants; each

The Author
maketh Quadrants
at sea.
of which were two foot and a half radius. Here we
had in like manner, as hath been mentioned on other days
of our sailings, very many Dolphins, and other sorts of fish
swimming about our ship.

On the morning following we saw again the Island of
Plate at N E. of our ship, giving us this appearance at that
distance of Prospect.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isle of PLATE.

The same day at the distance of six Leagues more or
less from the said Island, we saw another Island, called So-

Solango.
lango. This Isle lyeth close in by the Main-land. In the
evening we observed it to bare E. N. E. from us. Our
course was S. E. by S. and had the wind at S. W. by S. This
day likewise we found that our lesser ship was still a great
hindrance to our sailing, as being sorced to lye by, and
stay for her two or three hours every day. We experimented
likewise, that the farther from shoar we were, the
less wind we had all along; and that under the shoar we
were always sure of a fresh gale, though not so favourable
Great calmes
unto us as we could wish it to be. Hitherto we had used
to stand off forty Leagues, and yet notwithstanding in the
space of six days, we had not got above ten Leagues on our
voyage, from the place of our departure.


69

Page 69

August the twenty third, this day the wind was S. W.
by S. and S. S. W. In the morning we stood off. The
Island Solango, at N. E. by N. appeareth thus:

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isle of SOLANGO.

At S. by W. and about six Leagues distance from us, we

Point St. Helen.

descryed a long and even hill. I took it to be an Island,
and conjectured it might be at least eight Leagues distant
from the Continent. But afterwards we found it was a
point of Land joyning unto the Main, and is called Point
St. Helena,
being continued by a piece of Land which lyeth
low, and in several places is almost drowned from the
sight; so that it cannot be seen at two Leagues distance.
In this low-land the Spaniards have convenience for making
Pitch, Tar, Salt, and some other things, for which
purpose they have several houses here, and a Fryar, who
serveth them as their Chaplain. From the Island of Solango,
unto this place, are reckoned eleven leagues, more or
less. The Land is hereabouts indifferent high, and is likewise
full of Bays. We had this day very little wind to
help us in our Voyage, excepting what blasts came now
and then in snatches. These sometimes would prove pretty
fair unto us, and allow us for some little while a South
course. But our chiefest course was S. E. by S. The point
of St. Helen at South half East, and about six Leagues distance,
giveth exactly this appearance as followeth.


70

Page 70
[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta de Santa HELENA.

Here we found no great current of the Sea to move
any way. At the Isle of Plata, afore described, the Sea
ebbeth and floweth nigh thirteen foot perpendicular. About
four Leagues to Leeward of this Point is a deep Bay, having
a Key at the mouth of it, which taketh up the better
part of its wideness. In the deepest part of the Bay
on shoar, we saw a great smoak, which was at a Village belonging
to the Bay; unto which place the people were removed
from the Point above-mentioned. This afternoon
we had a small Westerly wind, our course being S. S. W.
Hereabouts it is all along a very bold shoar. At three of
the clock after noon, we tackt about to clear our selves of

Bark-logs.
the Point. Being now a little way without the Point, we
espied a sail, which we conceived to be a Bark. Hereupon,
we hoisted out our Canoa, and sent in pursuit of her, which
made directly for the shoar. But the sail proved to be nothing
else, then a pair of Bark-Logs, which arriving on
shoar, the men spread their sail on the sand of the Bay to
dry. At the same time there came down upon the shoar
an Indian on horseback, who hallowed unto our Canoa,
which had followed the Logs. But our men fearing to
discover who we were, in case they went too near the shoar,
No Canoas
hereabouts.
left the design and returned back unto us. In these parts the
Indians have no Canoas, nor any wood indeed that may be
thought fit to make them of. Had we been descryed by
these poor people, they would in all probability have been
very fearful of us. But they offered not to stir, which gave
us to understand, they knew us not. We could perceive
from the ship a great path leading unto the Hills. So that

71

Page 71
we believed this place to be a look-out, or watch-place, for
the security of Guayaquil. Between four and five we doubled
the point, and then we descryed the Point Chandy,
at the distance of six Leagues S. S. E. from this point. At
first sight it seemed like unto a long Island, but withal,
lower then that of St. Helena.

Tuesday August the 24th, this day at noon we took the

Cox's vessel
taken in a
Tow.
other ship wherein Captain Cox sailed into a Tow, she being
every day a greater hinderance than before unto our
Voyage. Thus about three in the afternoon we lost sight
of land, in standing over for Cape Blanco. Here we found
a strong current to move unto the S. W. The wind was
at S. W. by S. our course being S. by E. At the upper end
of this Gulf, which is framed by the two Capes aforementioned,
standeth the City of Guayaquil, being a very
Guayaquil.
rich place, and the Embarcadero, or Sea-port unto the great
City of Quito. Unto this place likewise, many of the Merchants
of Lima do usually send the Money they design for
Old Spain in Barks, and by that means save the Custom that
otherwise they should pay unto the King by carrying it on
board of the Fleet. Hither cometh much Gold from
Quito, and very good and strong broad-cloath, together
with Images for the use of the Churches, and several other
things of considerable value. But more especially
Cacao-nut the
best sort.
Cacao-nut, whereof Chocolate is made, which is supposed
here to be the best in the whole Universe. The Town of
Guayaquil consisteth of about one hundred and fifty great
houses, and twice as many little ones. This was the
Town unto which Captain Sawkins intended to make his
Voyage, as was mentioned above. When ships of greater
burthen come into this Gulf, they anchor without Lapina,
and then put their lading into lesser Vessels to carry it unto
the Town. Towards the evening of this day, a small
breez sprung up, varying from point to point. After
which, about nine of the clock at night we tacked about,
and stood off to Sea, W. by N.


72

Page 72

A prize taken.
As soon as we had tackt, we hapned to espy a Sail N.N.E.
from us. Hereupon, we instantly cast off our other Vessel,
which we had in a Tow, and stood round about after
them. We came very near unto the vessel before they
saw us, by reason of the darkness of the night. As soon as
they espied us, they immediately clapt on a wind, and sailed
very well before us; insomuch, that it was a pretty while
before we could come up with them, and within call. We
halled them in Spanish, by means of an Indian prisoner,
and commanded them to lower their top-fails. They answered,
they would soon make us to lower our own. Hereupon,
we fired several Guns at them, and they as thick at
us again with their Harquibusses. Thus they fought us
for the space of half an hour, or more, and would have
done it longer, had we not killed the man at the Helm;
after whom, none of the rest dared to be so hardy as to
take his place. With another of our shot we cut in pieces
and disabled their main-top halliards. Hereupon, they
cryed out for Quarter, which we gave them, and entred
their ship. Being possessed of the Vessel, we found in her
five and thirty men: of which number twenty four were
Natives of Old Spain. They had one and thirty fire arms
on board the ship for their defence. They had not fought
us, as they declared afterwards, but only out of a bravado,
having promised on shoar so to do, in case they met us at
Sea. The Captain of this Vessel was a person of Quality,
and his Brother, since the death of Don Jacinto de Barahona,
killed by us in the Engagement before Panama,
was now made Admiral of the Sea Armada. With him
we took also in this Bark, five or six other persons of Quality.
They did us in this fight, though short, very great
damage in our Rigging, by cutting it in pieces. Besides
which, they wounded two of our men. And a third man
was wounded by the negligence of one of our own men,
occasioned by a Pistol which went off unadvisedly. About
eleven of the clock this night we stood off to the West.


73

Page 73

The next morning about break of day, we hoisted out

What information
they had
from the Prize.
our Canoa, and went aboard the Bark which we had taken
the night before. We transported on board our own ship
more of the Prisoners taken in the said vessel, and began
to examine them, to learn what intelligence we could from
them. The Captain of the vessel, who was a very civil
and meek Gentleman, satisfyed our desires in this point
very exactly, saying unto us: Gentlemen, I am now your prisoner
at War by the over-ruling providence of fortune; and
moreover, am very well satisfyed that no money whatsoever can
procure my ransom, at least for the present at your hands.
Hence I am perswaded, it is not my interest to tell you a Lye;
which if I do, I desire you to punish me as severely as you shall
think fit. We heard of your taking and destroying our
Armadilla,
and other ships at Panama, about six weeks after that
Engagement, by two several Barks which arrived here from
thence. But they could not inform us whether you designed
to come any farther to the Southward; but rather, desired
we would send them speedily all the help by Sea that we could.
Hereupon, we sent the noise and rumour of your being in these
Seas, by land unto
Lima, desiring they would expedite what
succours they could send to joyn with ours. We had at that
time in our Harbour two or three great ships, but all of them
very unfit to sail. For this reason, at
Lima, the Vice-Roy of
Peru pressed three great Merchant ships, into the biggest of
which he put Fourteen brass guns; into the second, Ten; and
in the other Six. Unto these he added two Barks, and put
seven hundred and fifty Souldiers on board them all. Of this
number of men they landed eightscore at
Point St. Helena;
all the rest being carryed down to Panama, with design to fight
you there. Besides these Forces, two other men of War, bigger
than the afore-mentioned, are still lying at
Lima, and fitting
out there in all speed to follow and pursue you. One of these
men of war is equipped with thirty six brass guns, and the other
with thirty. These ships, beside their complement of seamen,
have four hundred Souldiers added unto them by the

Vice-Roy. Another man of war belonging to this number,

74

Page 74
and lesser than the afore-mentioned, is called the Patache.
This ship consisteth of twenty four guns, and was sent to Arica
to fetch the Kings Plate from thence. But the Vice-Roy having
received intelligence of your exploits at
Panama, sent
for this ship back from thence with such hast, that they came
away and left the Money behind them. Hence the
Patache
now lyeth at the Port of Callao, ready to sail on the first occasion,
or news of your arrival thereabouts: they having for
this purpose sent unto all parts very strict orders to keep a
good look-out on all sides, and all places along the Coasts. Since
this, from
Manta they sent us word, that they had seen two
Ships at sea pass by that place. And from the
Goat Key also
we heard, that the
Indians had seen you, and that they were
assured, one of your vessels was the ship called
la Trinidad,
which you had taken before Panama, as being a ship very well
known in these Seas. From hence we concluded, that your design
was to ply, and make your Voyage thereabouts. Now this
Bark wherein you took us prisoners being bound for
Panama,
the Governour of Guayaquil sent us out before her departure,
if possible to discover you. Which if we did, we were to run
the Bark on shoar and get away, or else to fight you with these
Souldiers and fire arms that you see. As soon as we heard of
your being in these Seas, we built two Forts, the one of six Guns,
and the other of four, for the defence of the Town. At the
last Muster taken in the Town of
Guayaquil, we had there eight
hundred and fifty men, of all colours; but when we came out,
we left only two hundred men that were actually under Arms.

Thus ended the Relation of that worthy Gentleman.
About noon that day we unrigged the Bark which we had
taken, and after so doing sunk her. Then we stood S.S.E.
and afterwards S. by W. and S.S.W. That evening we saw
Point St. Helena at North half East, at the distance of nine
Leagues more or less.

What Plate
they took in
the Prize.
The next day, being August the 26th, in the morning
we stood S. That day we cryed out all our pillage, and
found that it amounted unto 3276 Pieces of Eight, which
was accordingly divided by shares amongst us. We also

75

Page 75
punished a Fryar, who was Chaplain to the Bark afore-
Their cruelty
towards a
Fryar.
mentioned, and shot him upon the deck, casting him overboard
before he was dead. Such cruelties though I abhorred
very much in my heart, yet here was I forced to
hold my tongue and contradict them not, as having not
authority to oversway them. About ten of the clock
this morning we saw Land again, and the Pilot said we
were sixteen Leagues to leeward of Caho Blanco. Hereupon
we stood off and in, close under the shoar; the which
all appeared to be barren land.

The morning following we had very little wind; so

Eight of their
men destroyed
at
Gallo.
that we advanced but slowly all that day. To windward
of us we could perceive the Continent to be all high land,
being whitish clay, full of white Cliffts. This morning
in common discourse, our Prisoners confessed unto us, and
acknowledged the destruction of one of our little Barks,
which we lost in our way to the Island of Cayboa. They
stood away, as it appeared by their information, for the
Goat-key, thinking to find us there, as having heard Captain
Sawkins say, that he would go thither. On their
way they hapned to fall in with the Island of Gallo, and
understanding its weakness by their Indian Pilot, they
ventured on shoar, and took the place, carrying away three
white women in their company. But after a small time
of Cruising, they returned again to the aforesaid Island,
where they stayed the space of two or three days: after
which time they went out to sea again. Within three or
four days they came to a little Key four Leagues distant
from this Isle. But mean while they had been out and in
thus several times, one of their prisoners made his escape
unto the Main, and brought off from thence fifty men
with fire-arms. These placing themselves in Ambuscade,
at the first volly of their shot, they killed six of the seven
men that belonged unto the Bark. The other man that
was left took quarter of the enemy; and he it was that
discovered unto them our design upon the Town of Guayaquil.
By an observation which we made this day, we

76

Page 76
An Embargo
laid.
found our selves to be in the latitude of 3 d. 50. S. At
this time our prisoners told us, there was an Embargo laid
on all the Spanish ships, commanding them not to stir out
of the Ports, for fear of their falling into our hands at
Sea.

They sink Captain
Cox's
vessel.
Saturday August the 28th, this morning we took out all
the water, and most part of the flower that was in Captain
Cox's vessel. The people in like manner came on board
our ship. Having done this, we made a hole in the vessel,
and left her to sink, with a small old Canoa at her stern.
To Leeward of Manta, a League from shoar, in eighteen
fathom water, there runneth a great current outwards.
About eleven in the forenoon we weighed Anchor, with a
wind at W. N. W. turning it out. Our number now in all
being reckoned, we found our selves to be one hundred and
forty men, two boys, and fifty five prisoners, being all
Their whole
number.
now in one and the same bottom. This day we got six
or seven Leagues in the winds eye.

The first place
setled in these
Seas.
All the day following we had a very strong S. S. W.
wind; insomuch, that we were forced to sail with two
riffs in our main-top sail, and one also in our sore-top sail.
Here Captain Peralta told us, that the first place which the
Spaniards settled in these parts, after Panama, was Tumbes,
a place that now was to Leeward of us, in this Gulph
A strange story
where we now were. That there a Priest went ashoar
with a Cross in his hand, while ten thousand Indians stood
gazing at him. Being landed on the strand, there came
out of the woods two Lyons; that he laid the Cross gently
on their backs, and they instantly fell down and worshipped
it: and moreover, that two Tigres following them,
did the same; whereby these Animals gave unto the Indians
to understand the excellency of the Christian Religion,
which they soon after embraced. About four in the evening
we came abreast the Cape, which is the highest part
of all. The Land hereabouts appeareth to be barren and
Cabo Blanco.
rockey. At three Leagues distance East from us, the Cape
shewed thus:


77

Page 77
[ILLUSTRATION]

Cape BLANCO.

Were it not for a windward Current which runneth under
the shoar hereabouts, it were totally impossible for any
ships to get about this Cape; there being such a great
current to Leeward in the offing. In the last Bark which
we took, of which we spoke in this Chapter, we made
Prisoner one Nicolas Moreno, a Spaniard by Nation, and
who was esteemed to be a very good Pilot of the South Sea.
This man did not cease continually to praise our ship for
her failing, and especially for the alterations we had made
in her. As we went along, we observed many Bays to
lye between this Cape and Point Parina, of which we shall
soon make mention hereafter.

In the night the wind came about to S. S. E. and we had

Point Parina.
a very stiff gale of it. So that by break of day the next
morning, we found our selves to be about five Leagues distance
to windward of the Cape afore-mentioned. The
Land hereabouts maketh three or four several Bays, and
groweth lower and lower, by how much the nigher we
come unto Punta Parina. This Point sheweth it self at
first sight thereof like unto two Islands. Between four and
five of the clock that evening, we were West from the said
Point.

The next day likewise, being the last day of August, the
wind still continued S. S. E. as it had done the whole day
before. This day we thought it convenient to stand farther
out to sea, for fear of being descryed at Paita, which

Paita.

78

Page 78
now was not very far distant from us. The morning proved
to be hasey. But about eleven we espied a Sail, which
stood then just as we did, E. by S. Coming nearer unto it,
by degrees we found her to be nothing else than a pair of
Bark-logs under a sail, which were going that way. Our
Pilot advised us not to meddle with those Logs, nor mind
Bark-logs and
their use.
them in the least, for it was very doubtful whether we should
be able to come up with them or not; and then by giving
chace unto them, we should easily be descryed and known
to be the English Pirates, as they called us. These Barklogs
sail excellently well for the most part, and some of
them are of such a bigness, that they will carry two hundred
and fifty packs of Meal from the Valleys unto Panama,
without wetting any of it. This day by an observation
made, we found our selves to be in four degrees fifty five
Latitude South. Point Parina at N.E. by E. and at the distance
of six Leagues more or less, giveth this following
appearance.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta PARINA.


79

Page 79

At the same time la Silla de Paita bore from us S.E by
E. being distant only seven or eight Leagues. It had the
form of a high Mountain, and appeared thus unto us.

[ILLUSTRATION]

La Silla de PAITA.

The Town of Paita it self is situated in a deep Bay, about
two Leagues to Leeward of this Hill. It serveth for
an Embarcadero, or Port Town, unto another great place
which is distant from thence about thirteen Leagues higher
in the Country, and is called Piura, being seated in a very

Piura.
barren Country.

On Wednesday the first of September, our course was
S. by W. The midnight before this day we had a landwind
that sprung up. In the afternoon La Silla de Paita,
at the distance of seven Leagues, at E. by N. appeareth thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

La Silla de PAITA.

All along hereabouts is nothing but barren land, as was
said before. Hereabouts likewise for three or four days
last past, we observed along the Coasts many Seales.

That night as we sailed, we saw something that appeared
unto us to be as it were a light. And the next morn-


80

Page 80
A Prize descryed.

ing we espyed a sail, from whence we judged the light had
come. The vessel was at the distance of six Leagues from
us, in the winds eye, and thereupon we gave her chace.
She stood to windward as we did. This day we had an
observation, which gave us the Lat. 5 d. 30 S. At night
we were about four Leagues to Leeward of her; but so
great a Mist fell, that we suddainly lost sight of her. At
this time the weather was as cold with us as in England in
November. Every time we went about with our ship, the
What she was.
other did the like. Our Pilot told us, that this ship set
forth from Guayaqnil eleven days before they were taken.
And that she was laden with Rigging, Woollen, and Cotton
Cloath, and other Manufactures made at Quito. Moreover,
that he had heard that they had spent a Mast, and
had put into Paita to refit it.

The night following; they shewed us several lights
through their negligence, which they ought not to have
done, for by that means we steered directly after them.
The next morning she was more than three Leagues in
the winds eye distant from us. Had they suspected us, it
could not be doubted, but they would have made away towards
the Land; but they seemed not to fly nor stir for
our chace. The Land here all along is level, and not very
high. The weather was hasey, so that about eleven of
the clock that morning we lost sight of her. At this time

Their shortness
of provisions.
we had been for the space of a whole week, at an allowance
of only two draughts of water each day, so scarce
were Provisions with us. That afternoon we saw the vessel
again, and at night we were not full two Leagues distant
from her, and not more than half a League to Leeward.
We made short trips all the night long.

On Saturday, September the Fourth, about break of day,
we saw the ship again, at the distance of a League, more or
less, and not above a mile to windward of us. They stood
out assoon as they espied us, and we stood directly after
them. Having pursued them for several hours, about four
of the clock in the Afternoon, we came up within the distance


81

Page 81
of half our small Arms shot, to windward of them.
Hereupon they perceiving who we were, presently lower'd
all their Sails at once and we cast dice among our selves for
the first entrance. The lot fell to larboard; so that
twenty men belonging to that watch, entred her. In the
Vessel were found Fifty packs of Cacao-nut, such as Choco-
The Prize taken.

late is made of, many packs of Raw-silk, Indian cloth, and
Thred-stockings; these things being the principal part of
her Cargo. We stood out S. W. by S. all the night following.

The next day being come, we transported on board our
ship the chiefest part of her lading. In her hold we found
some Rigging, as had been told us by Nicholas Moreno our
Pilot, taken in the former Vessel off of Guayaquil: but the
greatest part of the Hold was full of Timber. We took
out of her also some Osenbriggs, of which we made Topgallant
fails, as shall be said hereafter. It was now nineteen
days, as they told us, since they set sail from Guyaquil;
and then they had onely heard there of our Exploits before
Panama, but did not so much as think of our coming
so far to the Southward, which did not give them the least
suspicion of us, though they had seen us for the space of
two or three days before at Sea, and always steering after
them; otherwise they had made for the land, and endeavoured
to escape our hands.

The next morning likewise we continued to take in the

They turn away
many prisoners.

remaining part of what goods we desired out of our Prize.
When we had done, we sent most of our Prisoners on board
the said vessel, and left only their fore-mast standing, all
the rest being cut down by the board. We gave them a
fore-sail to sail withal; all their own water, and some of
our flour to serve them for Provisions; and thus we turned
them away, as not caring to be troubled or encumbred
with too many of their company. Notwithstanding
we detained still several of the chiefest of our prisoners.
Such were Don Thomas de Argandona, who was Commander
of the vessel taken before Guayaquil; Don Christoval,

82

Page 82
and Don Baltazar, both Gentlemen of Quality taken with
him; Captain Peralta, Captain Juan Moreno, the Pilot,
and twelve slaves, of whom we intended to make good
use, to do the drudgery of our ship. At this time I reckoned
that we were about the distance of thirty five Leagues,
little more or less from Land. Moreover, by an observation
made this day, we found Lat. 7. d. 1. S. Our plunder
being over, and our Prize turned away, we sold both
Chests, Boxes, and several other things at the Mast, by the
voice of a Cryer.

On the following day we stood S. S. W. and S. W. by S.

One of their
company dyeth
all day long. That day one of our company dyed, named
Robert Montgomery, being the same man who was shot by
the negligence of one of our own men with a Pistol
through the leg, at the taking of the vessel before Guayaquil,
as was mentioned above. We had an observation also
this day, by which we now found Lat. 7. d. 26. S. On
the same day likewise we made a dividend, and shared all
They make a
dividend.
the booty taken in the last Prize. This being done, we
hoisted into our ship the Lanch which we had taken in her,
as being useful unto us. All these days last past, it was ob-
An observation
of these Seas.
served, that we had every morning a dark cloud in the
sky; the which in the North Sea would certainly foretell
a storm; but here it always blew over.

Wednesday September the eighth in the morning, we

They desery a
light at Sea.
threw our dead man above-mentioned into the Sea, and
gave him three French Volleys for his Funeral-Ceremony.
In the night before this day, we saw a light belonging to
some vessel at sea. But we stood away from it, as not desiring
to see any more sails to hinder us in our voyage towards
Arica, whither now we were designed. This Light
was undoubtedly from some ship to Leeward of us; but
on the next morning we could descry no sail. Here I
judged we had made a S. W. by S. way from Paita, and by
an observation found 8. d. 00. S.


83

Page 83

CHAP. XIII.

A continuation of their long and tedious Voyage to
Arica, with a description of the Coasts and
Sailings thereunto. Great hardship they endured
for want of Water and other Provisions.
They are descryed at
Arica, and dare not land
there; the Country being all in Arms before
them. They retire from thence, and go unto

Puerto de Hilo, close by Arica. Here they land,
take the Town with little or no loss on their side,
refresh themselves with Provisions; but in the
end are cheated by the
Spaniards, and forced
shamefully to retreat from thence.

ON September the Ninth we continued still to make a
S. W. by S. way, as we had done the day before. By
a clear and exact observation taken the same day, we found
now Lat. 8. d. 12 S. All the twenty four hours last past

Calms.
afforded us but little wind, so that we advanced but as little
on our Voyage, and were forced to tack about every
four or five hours.

The next day by another observation taken, we found
then Lat. 9 d. 00. Now the weather was much warmer

Warm weather
again.
than before; and with this warmth we had small and misty
rains that frequently fell. That evening a strong
breeze came up at S. E. by E.

The night following likewise we had a very great dew
that fell, and a fresh wind continued to blow. At this
time we were all hard at work to make small sails of the

They make sails
at Sea.
Osenbrigs we had taken in the last Prize, as being much

84

Page 84
more convenient for its lightness. The next morning being
Saturday September the 11th, we lay by to mend our
rigging. These last twenty four hours we had made a
S. by W. way. And now we had an observation that gave
us Lat. 10. D. 9. S. I supposed this day that we were
West from Cosmey about the distance of eighty nine leagues
and an half.

September the 12th. This day we reckoned a S. S. W.
way; and that we had made thirty four leagues and three
quarters or thereabouts. Also that all our Westing from
Paita was eighty four leagues. We supposed our selves
now to be in Lat. 11. D. 40. S. But the weather being hasey,
no observation could be made.

September the 13th, yesterday in the Afternoon we had

A great Eclipse
of the Sun.
a great Eclipse of the Sun, which lasted from one of the
clock till three after dinner. From this Eclipse I then took
the true judgment of our longitude from the Canary Islands,
and found my self to be 285 D. 35. in Lat 11 D.
45 S. The wind was now so fresh, that we took in our
Top-sails; making a great way under our Courses and
Sprit-sail.

September the 14th we had a cloudy morning, which

what followed
it.
continued so all the first part thereof. About eight it cleared
up, and then we set our fore-top-sail; and, about
noon, our main-top-sail likewise. This was observable,
that all this great wind precedent did not make any thing
of a great Sea. We reckoned this day that we had run
by a S. W. by W. way, twenty six Leagues, and two
thirds.

The next day, in like manner, we had close weather,
such as the former morning. Our reckoning was Twenty
four Leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by W. way. But,
by observation made, I found my self to be 23 D. Southward
of my reckoning, as being in the Lat. of 15 D. 17
South.

On the 16th, we had but small and variable winds.
For the twenty four hours last past we reckoned twenty


85

Page 85
four leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by S. way. By observation
we had Lat. 16. D. 41. That evening we had a
gale at E. S. E. which forced us to hand our top-sails.

The 17th likewise, we had many gusts of wind at several
times, forcing us to hand our top-sails often. But in
the forenoon, we set them with a fresh gale at E. S. E. My
reckoning this day was thirty one leagues by a S. S. W.
way. All day long we stood by our top-sails.

On the 18th, we made a S. by W. way. We reckoned
our selves to be in Lat. 19. D. 33. S. The weather was
hasey; and the wind began to dye this day by degrees.

The next day, being the 19th, we had very small wind.
I reckoned thirteen leagues and an half, by a S. W. by S.
way; and our whole Westing from Paita to be 164
leagues in Lat. 20. D. 06. S. All the afternoon we had a
calm, with drizling rain.

Monday, September the 20th. Last night we saw the
Magallan Clouds, which are so famous among the Mariners

Magallan
Clouds.
of these Southern Seas. The least of these clouds was about
the bigness of a mans hat. After this sight, the morning
was very clear. We had run at noon at E. S. E thirteen
leagues and an half: and, by an observation then
made, we found Lat. 20. D. 15. S. This day the wind began
to freshen at W. by S. Yet notwithstanding we had a
very smooth Sea.

But on the next morning, the wind came about to S.W.
and yet slacken by degrees. At four this morning it came
to S. by E. And at ten the same day, to S. E. by S. We
had this day a clear observation, and by it Lat. 20. D. 25.
S. We stood now E by N. with the wind at S. E.

September the 22d. This morning the wind was at
E. S. E. By a clear observation we found Lat. 19. D. 30
S. Likewise on a N. E. by E. way, ——— and two leagues
and two thirds.

September the 23d we had a fresh wind, and a high Sea.
This morning early the wind was at E. and about ten at
E. N. E. From a clear observation we found our latitude


86

Page 86
to be 20 D. 35 S. The way we made was S. by W. That
morning we hapned to split our Sprit-sail.

Next morning the wind was variable and inconstant,
and the weather but hasey. We reckoned a S. by E. way:
this day we bent a new main-top-sail; the old one serving
for a fore-top-sail. In the afternoon we had but little wind,
whereupon we lowered our top-sails; having, in like manner,
a very smooth sea.

The following day likewise brought us calm and warm
weather; which occasioned us to set up our shrouds both
fore and aft. An observation taken this day afforded us
Lat. 21. D. 57. That evening we bent a sprit-sail.

On September the 26th, an observation gave us Lat. 22.
D. 05. S. At noon we had a breez at N. N. E. our course
being E. S. E. In the afternoon we set up a larboard topsail
studden-sail. In the evening the wind came about at
North pretty fresh.

The next day we had a smooth sea, and took in four
studden-sails. For yesterday in the afternoon we had put
out, besides that above-mentioned, another studden-sail,
and two main studden-sails more. This day we had by
observation 22 D. 45 S. having made by an E. S. E. way,
thirty-five leagues and an half. Our whole Merid. differ.
sixty eight leagues and an half.

September the 28th, all the sorenoon we had very little
wind, and yet withal a great Southern sea. By observation
we had Lat. 22 D. 40 S.

September the 29th. All the night past we had much

Much rain.
wind, with three or four fierce showres of rain. This was
the first that we could call rain, ever since that we left Cape
Francisco
above-mentioned. This day our allowance was
shortned, and reduced unto three pints and a half of water,
Their allowance
shotned
again.
and one cake of boyled bread to each man for a day. An
observation this day gave us Lat. 21 D. 59 S. by a N. E. by
E. way.

On September the 30th we had a cloudy day, and the
wind very variable, the morning being fresh. Our way


87

Page 87
was N. E. half N. wherein we made eighteen leagues.

October the First. All the night past and this day we
had a cloudy sky, and not much wind. We made a N. E.

Their allowance
still shortens.

by E. way, and by it seventeen leagues and two miles.
This day we began at two pints and a half of water for a
day.

The Second, we made a E. N. E. way, and by it twenty
six leagues, more or less. Our observation this day gave
us Lat. 20 D. 29 S. I reckoned now that we were ten
leagues and an half to East of our Meridian, the Port of
Paita; so that henceforward our departure was Eastward.
The wind was this day at S. E. by S.

On the Third we had both a cloudy morning, a high
sea, and drizling weather. An observation which we had
this day, gave us Lat. 19 D. 45 S. In the afternoon the
wind blew so fresh, as that we were forced to hand our topsails
and sprit-sail.

The 4th likewise we had a high sea and a cold wind.
At break of day we set our top-sails. An observation made
afforded us Lat. 19 D. 8 S. Here we supposed our selves
fifty nine leagues D. M.

The 5th we had still a great sea, and sharp and cold
winds, forcing us to our low sails. By a N. E. by E way,
we reckoned this day twenty six leagues and an half.

But on the 6th we had great gusts of wind. Insomuch,
that this morning our ring-bolts gave way which held our
Main-stay, and had like to have brought our Main-mast by

Their Mainmast
in danger.
the board. Hereupon we ran three or four glasses West
before the wind. By an observation we found Lat. 19 D.
4 S.

On the 7th of October the wind was something fallen.
We had both a cloudy day and variable winds.

The 8th of the said Month we had again a smooth sea,
and small whiffling winds. This morning we saw a huge

Water-snakes
and Seals.
shoal of fish, two or three Water-snakes, and several Seals.

On the next day we had in like manner a very smooth
sea, and withal a cloudy day. Our course was East.


88

Page 88

October the Tenth, we had likewise a cloudy day, with
small and variable winds, and what is consequent unto
these, a smooth Sea. Our way was S. by E. This day

Tufts of seagrass.

we espied floating upon the Sea, several Tufts of Sea-grass,
which gave us good hopes that we were not far from shoar.
In the afternoon we had a N. E. by E. wind that sprangup.
the night was very cold and cloudy.

On the eleventh we had a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E.
together with a cloudy day; such as we had experimented
for several days before. We reckoned this day thirty two
Leagues by a N. E. by E. way. Here our Pilot told us, that

A Hasey sky
near shoar.
the sky is always hasey nigh the shoar upon these Coasts
where we now were.

On October the 12th we had a clear day, and a NorthEast
way.

A Whale seen.
The 13th we had but little wind. This day we saw a
Whale, which we took for an infallible token that we were
not far distant from Land, which now we hoped to see in
a few days. We made an E.S.E. way, and by it we reckoned
nineteen Leagues. All the evening was very calm.

Thursday October the 14th we had both a calm, and
close day until the afternoon. Then the weather became

Land-Fowles
sten.
very hot and clear. This day we saw several land-Fowls,
being but small Birds. Concerning which our Pilot said,
that they use to appear about one or two days sail from
the Land. Our reckoning was eleven Leagues by an E.S.E.
way. In the evening of this day we thought that we had
seen Land; but it proved to be nothing else than a foggy
bank.

October the 15th, both the night past, and this day, was
very clear. We made an observation this day, which gave
us Lat. 18 d. 00 South.

The 16th, last night and this day were contrary to the
former, both cloudy. Our way was N. E. by E. whereof
we reckoned thirteen Leagues.

They desery
land.
Sunday October the 17th the wind blew very fresh, our
course being E. N. E. About five that morning we saw

89

Page 89
Land; but the weather was so hasey, that at first we could
scarce perceive whether it was Land or not. It was distant
from us about eight Leagues, and appeared as a high and
round hill, being in form like unto a Sugar-loaf. We saw
Land afterwards all along to the S. E. by E. from it. In
the evening, we being then within five Leagues of the
shoar, the Land appeared very high and steep.

October the 18th, all the night last past we stood off to
sea with a fresh wind. This morning we could just see
Land at N. N. E. We reckoned a S. E. by E. way; and by
observation we found Lat. 17 d. 17 South.

Tuesday October the 19th, we had very cloudy weather,

High-lands
near
Arica.
finding what our Pilot had told us to be very true, concerning
the haseyness of this shoar. We saw all along as
we went very high Land, covered with Clouds; insomuch,
that we could not see its top.

On Wednesday the next day, we had likewise cloudy
weather, and for the most part calm. The same weather
being very cloudy, as before, continued in like manner on
Thursday.

Friday October 22. this morning we saw the Land plain

Punta de Hilo.
before us. Our Pilot being asked what Land that was, answered,
it was the Point of Hilo. At N.N.E. and about six
or seven Leagues distance it appeared thus unto us.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta de HILO.

Lat. 18. d. 4. S.

There is every morning and evening a brightness over
the Point, which lasteth for two or three hours, being
caused by the reflection of the Sun on the barren land, as


90

Page 90
it is supposed. This day we had but little wind; and the
Great want of
water.
huge want of water we were now under, occasioned much
disturbance among our men. As for my part, I must acknowledge
I could not sleep all night long through the
greatness of my drougth. We could willingly have landed
here to seek for water; but the fear of being discovered
and making our selves known, hindred us from so doing.
Thus we unanimously resolved to endure our thirst
for a little longer space of time. Hereabouts is a small
Current that runneth under the shoar. This morning
we had but little wind at South, our course being E S. E.
The Point at the distance of five leagues N. E. looketh on
the following side, thus:

[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta de HILO.

Our wind continued to blow not above six hours each
day. We reckoned the difference of our Meridian to be
this day one hundred and eighty leagues. Very great was

Half a pint a
day.
our affliction now for want of water; we having but half
a pint a day to our allowance.

October the 23d. This day we were forced to spare one
measure of water, thereby to make it hold out the longer;
so scarce it became with us. At three this afternoon the
Point looked thus:


91

Page 91
[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta de HILO.

Mora de SAMA.

Here the Point looketh like unto an Island. And Mora
de Sama,
to the Southward thereof, giveth this appearance:

[ILLUSTRATION]

Mora de SAMA.

About nine of the clock at night we had a land wind, and
with it we stood S. E. by S. But all the night after we had
but little wind.

October the 24th. All the night past we had very cloudy
and dark weather, with mizling rain. The morning
being come, it cleared up; but all the land appeared covered
with clouds. Yet notwithstanding in the afternoon it
gave us again this appearance.


92

Page 92
[ILLUSTRATION]

Mora de SAMA.

Lat. 18 d. 29 S.

Under the Hill of Mora de Sama are eighteen or nineteen
white cliffs; which appear in the form above descri-

They resolve to
land.
bed. This day we resolved that One hundred and twelve
men should go ashoar. And about eight this evening, we
sent our Lanch and four Canoas, with fourscore men, to
take three or four Fisher-men at a certain River, close by
Mora de Sama, called el Rio de Juan Diaz, with intent to
gain what intelligence we could how affairs stood at present
on the Coast and Country thereabouts.

Munday October the 25th. Last night being about the
distance of one league and an half from shoar, we sounded,
and found forty five fathom water, with an hard ground
at the bottom. This morning our people and Canoas that

They cannot
find the River.
were sent to take the Fishermen, returned, not being able
to find either their houses or the River. They reported
withal, they had had a very fresh wind all the night long under
shoar, whereas we had not one breath of wind all night
on board.

Tuesday October the 26th. Last night, being the night
before this day, about six of the clock, we departed from
the ship to go to take Arica, resolving to land about the

They dare not
land at
Arica.
distance of a league to windward of the Town. We were
about six leagues distant from the Town when we left our
ship, whereby we were forced to row all night, that we
might reach before day the place of our landing. Towards
morning, the Canoa's left the Lanch, which they had had all

93

Page 93
night in a Tow, and wherein I was; and made all the speed
they possibly could for the shoar, with design to land before
the Lanch could arrive. But being come nigh the
place where we designed to land, they found, to our great
sorrow and vexation, that we were descryed; and that all
along the shoar, and through the Country, they had certain
news of our arrival. Yet notwithstanding our discovery, we
would have landed, if we could by any means have found
a place to do it in. But the sea ran so high, and with such
a force against the rocks, that our boats must needs have
been staved each in one thousand pieces, and we in great
danger of wetting our arms, if we should adventure to go on
shoar. The Bay all round was possessed by several parties
of horse; and likewise the tops of the hills, which seemed
to be gathered there by a general alarm through the whole
Country, and that they waited onely for our landing, with
design to make a strong opposition against us. They fired
a gun at us, but we made them no answer, but rather returned
to our ship, giving over this enterprize until a fairer
opportunity. The hill of Arica is very white, being occa-
Hill of Arica.
sioned by the dung of multitudes of Fowls that nest themselves
in the hollow thereof. To Leeward of the said Hill
lyeth a small Island, at the distance of a mile, more or less,
from the shoar. About half a league from that Island, we
could perceive six ships to ride at anchor: four of which
had their Yards taken down from their Masts; but the other
two seemed to be ready for sail. We asked our Pilot
concerning these ships, and he told us that one of them was
mounted with six guns, and the other with onely four.
Being disappointed of our expectations at Arica, we now
resolved to bear away from thence to the Village of Hilo,
They bare away
for
Hilo.
there to take in Water and other Provisions; as also to
learn what intelligence we could obtain. All that night
we lay under a calm.

On October the 27th in the morning, we found our
selves to be about a league to windward of Mora de Sama.
Yet notwithstanding the weather was quite calm, and we


94

Page 94
onely drived with the current at Leeward. The land between
Hilo and Mora de Sama formeth two several Bays,
and the Coast runneth along N.W. and S.E. as may appear
by the following demonstration. Over the land we could
see from our ship, as we drove the coming or rising of a
very high land, at a great distance far up in the Country.

October the 28th. The night before this day, we sent

They send away
men to land
there.
away our four Canoas with fifty men in them, to seize and
plunder the Town of Hilo. All the day was very calm,
as the day before.

The next morning about break of day, we had a fair
breeze sprang up, with which we lay right in with the

They arrive at
the
Port.
Port. About one in the afternoon we anchored, and the
Port lyeth thus, as is here described.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Port of HILO.

We cast anchor at the distance of two miles from the
Village: and then we perceived two flags, which our men

The Town taken.

had put out, having taken the Town, and set up our English
Colours. The Spaniards were retreated unto the hills,
and there had done the same. Being come to an anchor,
our Commander Captain Sharp sent a Canoa on board of
us, and ordered that all the men our ship could spare, should
come ashoar. Withal they told us, that those of our party
that landed the morning before, were met by some
horsemen on the shoar, who onely exchanged some few
volly's of shot with our men, but were soon put to flight.
That hereupon our forces had marched directly to the
Town, where the Spaniards expecting we would have landed
at first, made a breast-work, thirty paces long, of clay

95

Page 95
and banks of sand. Here, in a small skirmish, we hapned
to kill an Indian, who told us before he dy'd, that they
had received news of our coming, nine days ago, from Lima,
and but one day before from Arica. Having taken
the Town, we found therein great quantity of Pitch, Tar,
Oyl, Wine and Flower, with several other sorts of provisions.
We endeavoured to keep as good a watch as the Spaniards
did on the hills, fearing lest they should suddainly
make any attempt to destroy us.

On the next day, being October the 30th, we chose out
threescore men of them who were the fittest to march, a-

They search the
valley.
mong the rest; and ordered them to go up and search the
valley adjoyning and belonging to the Town. We found
the said valley to be very pleasant, being all over set with
Fig-trees, Olive-trees, Orange, Lemmon, and Lime-trees,
with many other fruits agreeable to the Palat. About four
miles up within the valley, we came to a great Sugarwork,
or Ingenio de azucar, as it is called by the Spaniards,
where we found great store of Sugar, Oyl, and Molossus. But
most of the Sugar, the owners had hidden from us in the
cane it self. As we marched up the vally, the Spaniards marched
along the hills, and observed our motion. From the
tops of the hills they often tumbled down great stones upon
us, but with great care we endeavoured to escape those
dangers, and but the report of one Gun would suddainly
cause them all to hide their heads. From this house, I
mean the Sugar-work above-mentioned, Mr. Cox, my self,
and one Cannis a Dutchman (who was then our Interpreter)
went unto the Spaniards with a flag of Truce. They
met us very civilly, and promised to give us fourscore
They agree
with the
Spaniards.

Beeves for the Ransom of the Sugar-work, and upon condition
that it should not be spoilt nor demolished. With
them we agreed, that they should be delivered unto us at
the Port, the next day at noon. Hereupon Captain Sharp
in the evening sent down unto the Port twenty men, with
strict orders that our forces there should offer no violence
in the least unto those that brought down the Beeves.


96

Page 96

Sunday, October the 31st. This day being employed in
casting up some accounts belonging to our Navigation, I
reckoned that Hilo was to the Eastward of Paita, one hundred
eighty and seven leagues. This morning the Captain
of the Spaniards came unto our Commander Captain
Sharp, with a flag of Truce; and told him, that sixteen
Beeves were already sent down unto the Port, and that the
rest should certainly be there the next morning. Hereupon
we were ordered to prepare our selves to retreat, and
march back unto the Port, and there embark our selves on
board our ship. My advice was to the contrary, that we
should rather leave twenty men behind to keep the house
of the Sugar-work, and that others should possess themselves
of the Hills, thereby to clear them of the Spaniards
and their look out. But my counsel not being regarded,
each man took away what burthen of Sugar he pleased, and

They begin to
nd double
dealing in the
enemy.
thus we returned unto our vessel. Being come there, we
found no Beeves had been brought down at all, which occasioned
us much to suspect some double dealing would in
the latter end be found in this case.

The next morning being November the first, our Cap-

A parly with
the enemy.
tain went unto the top of the Hills afore-mentioned, and
spoke with the Spaniards themselves, concerning the performance
of their agreement. The Spaniards made answer,
that the Cattle would certainly come down this night.
But in case it did not, that the Master or Owner of the
Sugar-work was now returned from Potosi, and we might
go up and treat with him, and make, if we pleased, a new
bargain for the preservation of his House and Goods;
whose interest it was, more than theirs, to save it from
being demolished. With this answer our men returned
unto us, and we concluded to expect until the next day for
the delivery of the Beeves.

On the following day about eight in the morning, there

A flag of truce
came in unto us a Flag of Truce from the enemy, telling
us, that the winds were so high, that they could not drive
the Cattle, otherwise they had been delivered before now.

97

Page 97
But withal, that by noon we should in no manner fail to
have them brought unto us. Noon being come, and no
Cattle appearing, we now having filled our water, and
finished other concerns, resolved to be revenged on the
Enemy, and do them what mischief we could; at least, by
setting fire on the Sugar-work. Hereupon, threescore
They burn the
Sugar-work.
men of us marched up the valley, and burnt both the
House, the Canes, and the Mill belonging to the Ingenio.
We broke likewise the Coppers, Coggs, and multitudes of
great Jars of Oyl that we found in the house. This being
done, we brought away more Sugar, and returned unto the
Port over the Hills or Mountains; the which we found to
be very pleasant, smooth, and level after once we had ascended
them. It fell out very fortunately unto us that we
returned back this way we did, for otherwise our men at
the Sea-side had inevitably been cut off and torn in pieces
by the enemy, they being at that time dispersed and stragling
up and down by two and three in a Party. For from
Three hundred
Horse coming
against them.
the Hills we espied coming from the Northward of the
Bay, above three hundred horsemen, all riding at full speed
towards our men, who had not as yet descryed them, and
little thought of any such danger from the enemy so nigh
at hand. Being alarumed with this sight, we threw down
what Sugar we had, and ran incontinently to meet them,
thereby to give our other men time to rally, and put themselves
into a posture of defence. We being in good rank
and order, fairly proffered them Battle upon the Bay; but
as we advanced to meet them, they retired and rid towards
the Mountains to surround us, and take the Rocks from
us if possibly they could. Hereupon, perceiving their intentions,
we returned back and possest our selves of the said
Rocks, and also the lower Town; as the Spaniards themselves
did of the upper Town (at the distance of half a mile
from the lower) the Hills and the Woods adjoyning thereunto.
The Horsemen being now in possession of these Quarters,
we could perceive, as far as we could see, more and
more men resort unto them, so that their Forces encreased

98

Page 98
hourly to considerable numbers. We fired one at another
as long as we could reach, and the day would permit. But
in the mean while we observed, that several of them rid
unto the Watch-hill, and looked out often to the Sea-board.
This gave us occasion to fear, that they had more strength
and Forces coming that way, which they expected every
minute. Hereupon, least we should speed worse than we
They are forced
to retreat.
had done before, we resolved to imbark silently in the dark
of the night, and go off from that Coast where we had
been so early descryed, and the enemy was so much prepared
against us. We carryed off a great Chest of Sugar,
whereof we shared seven pound weight and a half each
What they got
at
Hilo.
man; thirty Jars of Oyl, and great plenty of all sorts of
Garden Herbs, Roots, and most excellent Fruit.

CHAP. XIV.

The Bucaniers depart from the Port of Hilo, and
sail unto that of
Coquimbo. They are descryed
before their arrival. Notwithstanding they
land: are encountred by the
Spaniards, and put
them to flight. They take, plunder, and fire the
City of
la Serena. A description thereof. A
Stratagem of the
Spaniards in endeavouring to
fire their ship, discovered and prevented. They
are deceived again by the
Spaniards, and forced
to retire from
Coquimbo, without any Ransom
for the City, or considerable pillage. They release
several of their chiefest Prisoners.

They depart
from
Hilo.
THe next morning (being Wednesday November the
third, 1680.) about seven of the clock we set sail
from Hilo, standing directly off to Sea, with a small landwind.

99

Page 99
[ILLUSTRATION]

100

Page 100
[ILLUSTRATION]

99

Page 99
Upon the shoar we could not discover this morning,
above fifty men of our Enemies Forces, which caused
us to suspect the rest were run away from their Colours,
and had deserted in the dark of the night. If this were so,
we were equally afraid of each other, and as we quitted
the Land, being jealous of their multitudes, so they abandoned
their stations for fear of our Encounters. All the
while we lay in the Port of Hilo, we had a fresh wind, but
now being come out from thence, we found it was almost
stark calme. Hereabouts runneth a great Sea all along
this Coast, as we experimented at Arica; insomuch, that
there is no landing except under the favour of some Rock
or other.

November the fourth in the morning, we saw the Port

A great reflection.

of Hilo at E.N.E. at the distance of nine Leagues, more
or less from the Land. The white sand giveth a bright reflection
over the land; the which we could see after we
had lost the sight of the land it self.

The next day unto this, we had an indifferent fresh wind
at S.S.E. We reckoned a S. W. half west way, and by it,
that we had made twenty Leagues. The day was very
fair and sun-shiny, and the sea very smooth

November the 6th, we had a clear night the last past, and
the day proved very fair and clear, like unto the former.
We reckoned by a S. W. by W. way, about twenty one
leagues. In the afternoon it was almost stark calme.

On the following day we had in like manner very little

They are troubled
with the
Survey.
wind, no more than the last twenty four hours. We were
now about this time many of us very much troubled and
diseased with the Survey. It proceeded as we judged, from
the great hardship and want of Provisions which we had
endured for several Months past, as having had only bread
and water, as was mentioned above. Only at Hilo we
At Hilo they
eat a
Mule.
killed a Mule, which gave unto those who would eat of
the flesh, a very good meal, as we esteemed it, the Spaniards
having swept away with them all other provisions of
flesh. But there we had plundered some small quantity of

100

Page 100
Chocolate.
good Chocolate, whereof the Spaniards make infinite use.
So that now we had each morning a dish of that pleasant
liquor, containing almost a pint.

Next day likewise we had very little wind, as before.
We made an observation this day, and found Lat. 20. d. 05.
South.

November the Ninth we had still very little wind, and
that variable. We took almost every hour an observation,
and found our selves to be in the Lat. of 20 d. 18. South.

The 10th we had in like manner but little wind, as for
so many days before. We observed an E.S.E. current, or
nearest unto it, to run hereabouts. This day we saw the

They descry
land.
homing of a very high land, which much admired us, for
at this time I conceived we could not be less than thirty
five or forty leagues distant from land. We supposed it to
be Mora Tarapaca. That day we set up our shrouds.

Upon the 11th an indifferent gale of wind sprang up at

But are deceived.

S. W. by S. by which we made twenty five Leagues, and
one third. We had now a great S.S.W. sea. In the night
the wind as we experimented, came one or two points from
the land. This morning we saw the like homing of land,
whereby we were made sensible it was no land, that which
we had seen the day before.

On the 12th we had several mists of rain, with windy
weather. We made by a S. S. W. half S. way, twenty five
leagues and one third. We had likewise a great and rowling
S. S. W. sea, as the day before.

The 13th of the said Month, we had both cloudy and
misty weather. We made a S. S. W. and one quarter S.
way; by which we ran fifty leagues.

But the next day, fair and clear weather came about again.
We had likewise an easie gale of wind, by which we
made a S. W. way, and advanced twenty two leagues and
an half.

On the 15th of November, we had also clear weather, and
an indifferent gale of wind. Our way was S. W. by W. by
which we reckoned eighteen leagues. Likewise that our


101

Page 101
Westing from Hilo, from whence we set forth, was one
hundred and fourteen leagues, and one third. Our latitude
by observation we found to be 23 D. 25 S. I took
The Table of
Lima used by
the Author.
now the Declination-Table used and made by the Cosmographer
of Lima.

Tuesday, November the 16th. In the night last past,
we had a shower or two of rain. This day we made an
observation, by which we found Lat. 23 D. 35 S.

The 17th we made a S. W. by W. half S. way. By observation
we found Lat. 23 D. 46 S. with very little wind.

The 18th, upon a S. W. by W. way, we made twenty
one leagues. By observation we found Lat. 24 D. 20
South.

Friday, Nov. the 19th, 1680. This morning, about an

A Comet seen.
hour before day, we observ'd a Comet to appear, a degree N.
from the bright in Libra. The body thereof seemed dull;
and its tail extended it self eighteen or twenty degrees in
length, being of a pale colour, and pointing directly N. N.
W. Our prisoners hereupon reported unto us, that the
Strange sights
seen in the Air.
Spaniards had seen very strange sights, both at Lima, the
capital City of Peru, Guayaquil, and other places, much about
the time of ur coming into the South Seas. I
reckoned this day we had ran twenty leagues by a S. W.
way.

The following day, unto the appearance of the Comet,

What followed
the Comet.
we had many storms of wind at S. S. E. and at E. S. E. Our
reckoning by a S. W. by W. way, was twenty two
leagues.

Sunday, November the 21th, we had likewise many
gusts of wind, such as the day before, with frequent showers
of rain. The wind varyed to and fro, according as the
Clouds drew it here and there. We reckoned a S. S. W.
way, and by it twenty one leagues and a half. In all. West
from Hilo, we judged our selves to be one hundred seventy
eight leagues and two thirds. We had this day a great
S. W. Sea, and cloudy weather. I supposed our Latitude
to be 26 D. 53 S.


102

Page 102

November the 22d we had in like manner cloudy weather,
and now but little wind. We reckoned a S. way, and fifty
one leagues.

The 23d we had very little wind, all the storm, after

Calm weather
again.
the appearance of the Comet, being now quite allayed.
We reckoned we had made a S. E. by E. way; and found
our latitude, by observation, to bare 27 D. 46 S.

Wednesday, November the 24th. All the twenty four
hours last past, we had a N. W. wind. Our way was S E.
half S. by which we reckoned thirty one leagues and one
third.

The 25th. Last night the wind blew at W. S. W. but
this morning it came about again at N. W. as the day before.
Our reckoning this day was a S. E. and one quarter
E. way, twenty nine leagues and one third Our Latitude
now, by observation made this day, was 39 D. 57 S. Our
difference of Merid. 135⅓.

November the 26th. In the night the wind started to
S. S. W. But this day at noon we had little better than a
calm. I reckoned an E.S.E. half E. way, and by it twenty
three leagues.

Saturday the 27th. Yesterday in the evening the wind
came to S. I reckoned an East, and something Southerly
way, and by that, twenty three leagues, as the day before
this.

November the 28th. All the twenty four hours last past
we enjoyed a fresh wind at S. S E. having a high S. W. sea.
Our reckoning was an E. by N. and half N. way, and withal
twenty four leagues. By observation, we found Lat.
30 D. 16 S. and Meridian distance eighty eight leagues.
At noon the wind came at S. half E.

On the 29th we had a very great S. W. sea; and withal
cloudy weather. My reckoning was by an E. one third
S. way, twenty leagues and one third. This day we hap-

Great fowls.
ned to see two or three great fowls flying in the air. Concerning
which our Pilot told us, that they used to appear
seventy or eighty leagues off from the Island, called of Juan

103

Page 103
Fernandez. The day before this, Captain Peralta our pri-
Captain Peralta
taken frantick.

soner, was taken very much frantick, his distemper being
occasioned, as we thought, through too much hardship and
melancholy. Notwithstanding, this present day he became
indifferent well again.

The following day we had likewise cloudy weather.
We made, according to our account, an E. half N. way,
and by it sixteen leagues and two thirds. Our Meridian
difference fifty two leagues.

The first of December we had hasey weather, and withal
an indifferent good wind at S. yea, sometimes S. by W.
Our way was E. by S. by which we reckoned twenty two
leagues. The night before this day, we sailed over white
water like banks, of a mile in length, or more. But these
banks, upon examination, we found to be onely great

Huge shoals of
Anchovas.
shoals of Anchovas.

On December the second, very early in the morning, we

They see land.
espied Land, the which appeared to be very high. About
noon this day we were at six leagues distance from it. All
the preceding night we had so much wind, that we were
forced to make use only of a pair of courses. By an observation
made this day, we found Lat. 30. d. 35. South.
We went away largely, driving better than nine leagues
every watch. With this wind we made all the Sail we possibly
could, designing by this means to get into Coquimbo,
Bay of Coquimbo.

upon which Coast we now were before night. But the
wind was so high, that sometimes we were forced to lower
all our sail, it blowing now a meer fret of wind. Towards
the evening it abated by degrees; insomuch, that at midnight
it was stark calme again. At that time we hoisted
out our Lanch and Canoas, and putting into them one
hundred men, we rowed away from the ship, with design
to take by surprizal a considerable City, situated nigh unto
the Coast, called by the Spaniards, la Ciudad de la Serena.


104

Page 104

They land and
take the City
of
la Serena.
Friday December the third, 1680. when we departed
from the ship, we had above two leagues, more or less, to
row unto the shoar. But as it hapned, the Lanch (wherein
I was) rowed so heavy, in comparison to the Canoas, that
we could not keep pace with the said Boats. For this reason,
and no other, it was broad day before we got unto a
certain Store-house, situate upon the shoar; the which we
found our men had passed by in the dark of the night,
without perceiving it. They being landed, immediately
marched away from their Canoas, towards the City aforementioned
of la Serena. But they had not proceeded far
on their march, when they found, to the great sorrow and
chagrin of us all, that we were timely discovered here also,
as we had been at the other two places before, to wit,
Arica and Hilo. For as they marched in a body together,
being but thirty five men in all, who were all those that
were landed out of the Canoas, they were suddainly encountred
and engaged by a whole Troop of an hundred
They rout the
Spanish horse.
Spanish horse. We that were behind hearing the noise of
the dispute, followed them at their heels, and made all
the hast we possibly could to come up to their relief. But
before we could reach the place of the Battle, they had already
routed the Spaniards, and forced them to fly away
towards the Town.

A Stratagem
of the Enemy.
Notwithstanding this rout given unto the horse, they
rallyed again, at the distance of about a mile from that
place, and seemed as if they did wait for us, and would
engage us anew. But as soon as all our Forces were come
together, whereof we could make but fourscore and eight
men in all, the rest being left behind to guard the Boats,
we marched towards them and offered them Battle. As
we came nigh unto them we clearly found they designed
no such thing; for they instantly retired and rid away
before us, keeping out of the reach of our guns. We followed
them as they rid, being led by them designedly clear
out of the road that went unto the Town, that we
might not reach nor find it so soon. In this engagement

105

Page 105
with the horse, our company had killed three of their chiefest
men, and wounded four more; killing also four of
their horses. When we found that we had been led by this
stratagem of the enemy, out of the way of the Town, we
left the Bay, and crossed over the green fields to find it;
wading oftentimes over several branches of water, which
there serve to enclose each plot of ground. Upon this
march we came unto several houses, but found them all
empty, and swept clean both of inhabitants and provisions.
We saw likewise several horses and other heads of
cattel in the fields, as we went along towards the City.
This place of la Serena, our Pilot had reported unto us to
La Serena a
considerable
City.
be but a small Town; but being arrived there, we found in
it no fewer than seven great Churches and one Chappel
belonging thereunto. Four of these Churches were Monasteries
or Convents, and each Church had its Organs
for the performance of Divine Service. Several of the
houses had their Orchards of Fruit, and Gardens, belonging
unto them; both Houses and Gardens being as well
and as neatly furnished, as those in England. In these Gar-
Huge Strawberries.

dens we found Strawberries as big as Walnuts, and those
verg delicious to the taste. In a word, every thing in this
City of la Serena, was most excellent and delicate, and far
beyond what we could expect in so remote a place. The
Town was inhabited by all sorts of Tradesmen, and besides
them, had its Merchants, some of which were accounted
to be very rich.

The Inhabitants of la Serena, upon our approach and dif-

The Inhabitants
all fled.
covery, were all fled, carrying with them whatsoever was
most precious of their goods and jewels, or less cumbersome
unto them. Much of their valuable things they had likewise
concealed or buryed, as having had time since we were
first discovered, so to do. Besides that they had had forewarning
enough how to beware of us, sent them over land
from Arica, and several other places where we had landed
or been descryed at Sea. Notwithstanding, we took in
the Town one Fryer, and two Chileno's, or Spaniards natives

106

Page 106
of the Kingdom of Chile, which adjoyneth unto that of
Peru, towards the Streight of Magallanes. These Prisoners
related unto us, that the Spaniards, when they heard
of our coming, had killed most of their Chilean slaves, fearing
lest they should run or revolt from them unto us.
Moreover, that we had been descryed from their Coasts
four days before our arrival, or descent upon land; all the
which time they had employed in carrying away their
The Bucaniers
timely descryed
by the
Enemy,
and prevented.
Plate and Goods. Unto this information they added, that
for their defence they had received a supply of sixty men
from Arica. Having taken possession of the Town, that
evening there came a Negro unto us, running away from
the Spaniards. He likewise informed us, that when we
were before Panama, we had taken a Negro, who was esteemed
to be the best Pilot in all the South-sea; but more
especially for this place, and all the Coasts of Coquimbo.
Moreover, that if the Spaniards had not sent all the Negro's
belonging unto this City farther up into the Country,
out of our reach and communication, they would all
undoubtedly have revolted unto us.

They pursue the
Inhabitants,
but in vain.
That night about midnight our Boatswain, being accompanied
by forty men, and having a Chilean for their guide,
went out of the Town some miles within the Country,
with design to find out the places where the Spaniards lay
concealed, and had hid their goods and plate. But before
they came, the Spaniards had received intelligence thereof
from some secret spies they had in the Town, and both the
men and their women were all fled to places that were
more occult and remote. So that by this search, they only
found an old Indian woman and three children; but no
gold nor plate, nor yet any other prisoners. This morning
our ship came to an anchor, by the Store-house abovementioned,
named Tortuga, at the distance of a furlong
from shoar, in the depth of seven fathom water. Mean
while we were quartered in the Town, I took this following
ground-plat thereof.


107

Page 107
[ILLUSTRATION]

108

Page 108

A flag of Truce
from the Enemmy.

The next morning, being Saturday, December the 4th,
came into the Town a flag of Truce from the Enemy.
Their message was to proffer a ransom for the Town to
preserve it from burning; for now they began to fear we
would set fire unto it, as having found no considerable
booty nor pillage therein. The Captains, or chief Commanders
of both sides, met about this point, and agreed
95000 pieces
of eight promised.

betwixt them for the sum of 95000 pieces of eight to be
the price of the whole ransom. In the afternoon of this
day, I was sent down unto the Bay of Coquimbo, with a
party of twenty men, to carry thither both goods taken in
the Town, and provisions for the ship. It is two leagues
and a half from the Town unto the Port; one league on the
Bay, the rest being a very great road, which leadeth from
the Bay unto the City. The Spaniards promised that the
Ransom should be collected and paid in by the next day.
This day also there dyed one of our Negro slaves on board
the ship.

The following day in the morning, I returned back unto
the Town, with the men I had brought down the day before.
Onely six of them I left behind, to look after our
Canoa's at the end of the Bay. When I came up into the

The Enemy
breaketh his
promise.
City, I found that the Spaniards had broken their promise,
and had not brought in the Ransom they had agreed for;
but had begged more time until to morrow at eight in the
forenoon. This evening another party of our men went
down unto the ship, to carry goods, such as we had pillaged
An Earthquake.

in the Town. Moreover, that night about nine of the
clock, hapned an Earthquake, the which we were very
sensible of, as we were all together in the Church of San
Juan,
where our chief rendezvous and Corps du garde was
kept. In the night the Spaniards opened a sluyee, and let
the water run in streams about the Town, with intent either
to overflow it, and thereby force us out of the place,
or at least that they might the easier quench the flame, in
case we should fire the Town.


109

Page 109

On the next morning we set fire to the Town, percei-

They fire the
Town.
ving it to be overflown, and that the Spaniards had not
performed, or rather that they never designed to perform
their promise. We fired, as nigh as we could, every house
in the whole Town, to the intent it might be totally reduced
into ashes. Thus we departed from la Serena, carrying
with us what plunder we could find, having sent two
parties before loaded with goods unto the ship, as was mentioned
above. As we marched down unto the Bay, we
beat up an Ambuscade of two hundred and fifty horse,
An Ambuscade
of the Enemy.
which lay by the way in private, with an intent to fall on
our men, in case we had sent down any other party again
with goods unto the ship. When we came to the Sea-side,
being half way unto our ship, we received advice that the
Spaniards had endeavoured, by an unusual stratagem, to
A stratagem
discovered.
burn our ship, and by these means destroy us all. They
acted thus: They up blew a horses hide like unto a bladder,
and upon this float a man ventured to swim from shoar,
and come under the stern of our ship. Being arrived there,
he crammed Okeham and Brimstone, and other combustible
matter, between the Rudder and the Stern-post. Having
done this, he fired it with a match, so that in a small time
our Rudder was on fire, and all the ship in a smoak. Our
men both alarmed and amazed with this smoak, ran up and
down the ship, suspecting the prisoners to have fired the
vessel, thereby to get their liberty and seek our destruction.
At last they found out where the fire was, and had
the good fortune to quench it, before its going too far. Assoon
as they had put it out, they sent the boat ashoar, and
found both the hide afore-mentioned, and the match burning
at both ends, whereby they came acquainted with the
whole matter. When we came unto the Store-house on
the shoar-side, we set at liberty the Fryar our prisoner, and
another Gentleman who was become our Hostage for the
performance of the Ransom. Moreover, when we came a-
They set at liberty
their
chief prisoners.
board, we sent away and set at liberty Captain Peralta,
Don Thomas de Argandona, Don Baltazar, Don Christoval,


110

Page 110
Captain Juan, the Pilots Mate, the old Moor, and several others
of our chiefest prisoners. Unto this releasment of
our prisoners we were moved, partly because we knew not
well what to do with them, and partly because we feared
lest by the example of this stratagem, they should plot our
destruction in earnest, and by the help of so many men, especially
persons of Quality, be able to go through it.

CHAP. XV.

The Bucaniers depart from Coquimbo for the Isle of
Juan Fernandez. Anexact account of this Voyage.
Misery they endure, and great dangers they escape
very narrowly there. They mutiny among themselves,
and choose
Watling to be their chief Commander.
Description of the Island. Three Spanish
Men of War meet with the Bucaniers, at
the said Island; but these outbrave them on the
one side, and give them the slip on the other.

BEing all embarked again, as was mentioned in the precedent
Chapter, the next morning, which was Tuesday,
December the 7th, twenty of us were sent ashoar to observe
the motion of the Enemy. We went unto the look-out,
or watch-hill, but from thence could learn nothing. Hereupon,
about noon we returned on board the ship, and at
two in the afternoon, we weighed anchor, and set sail, directing
our course for the Isle of Juan Fernandez, not far distant
from the Coast of Coquimbo. At night we were five
leagues distant from thence at N. W. by N. The Southermost
Island of those which are called de los Paxaros, or the

Islas de lso
Paxaros.
Islands of Birds, was then N. N. W. from us. Before
our departure, I took this following draught of the Bay of
Coquimbo, and City of la Serena.


111

Page 111
[ILLUSTRATION]

112

Page 112

December the 28th we had but very little wind, and a
leeward current here, which we could perceive did heave
us to the Northward. The afore-mentioned Island de los
Paxaros,
at three in the afternoon, bore N. E of us. At
the distance of three leagues, more or less, it appeared
thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isla de los PAXAROS.

It is distant from the main Continent four leagues,
and from the next Island of the same name, about two.
The Main is extream high and mountainous hereabouts.
At evening we were West from the said Island five leagues.
About eight or nine leagues to Windward of Coquimbo, are

white cliffs.
certain white cliffs, which appear from the shoar to those
that are off at Sea.

On the 9th of December we had likewise but little wind,
as the day before. I supposed my self this day to be about
thirteen leagues West from the Island above-mentioned.
The weather was cloudy, with misling rain, so that no ob-

They are put to
an allowance
of water.
servation could be taken. However, this day it was thought
convenient to put us to an allowance of water; for we had
taken in little or none at Coquimbo. The same weather,
or very like unto it, we had the next day, being the
10th; that is to say, stark calm and cloudy.

On the 11th of December, we had some small rain in the

Calms.
forepart of the day. But in the afternoon it cleared up, so

113

Page 113
that the weather was very hot. We had still but little
wind.

The next day, December the 12th, we had very sair
weather, and by a clear observation made this day, we found
Lat. 30 D. 06 S.

December the 13th. By a W. S. W. way, we made forty
two leagues. By observation we found Lat. 30 D. 45
S. D. M. four leagues and two thirds.

On the 14th in the morning, we had a handsom shower
of rain, which continued for some while. Then, about
eight of the clock, there sprang up a S. S. W. breeze. My
reckoning was by an E. S. E. way, fourteen leagues. And
by observation, we found this day 30 D. 30 S. In the af-

One of their
company dyeth.
ternoon of this day, dyed one of our men, whose name
was William Cammock. His disease was occasioned by a
surfeit, gained by too much drinking on shoar at la Serena;
the which produced in him a Calenture, or Malignant Feaver,
and an Hicup. Thus in the evening we buryed him
in the Sea, according to the usual custom of Mariners, giving
him three French Vollies for his Funeral.

The following day, we had an indifferent fresh wind on
both tacks. Our way was W. S. W. and by it we reckoned
thirty four leagues. So likewise by an observation we
had Lat. 30 D. 42 S. All the afternoon blew a S. by W.
wind very fresh, with a short topping S. W. Sea.

But on the next ensuing day, we had no small breez, but
rather hard gusts of wind. These grew so high, that they
forced us to take in our top-sails. We made a S. W. half
S. way, and forty five leagues.

On the 17th we had likewise high winds, and withal a
S. W. sea. Our way W. by S. By observation taken this
day, we found Lat. 30 D. 51 S. In the afternoon we had
a S. S. E. wind, our course being S. W.

December the 18th. This day we had the same high
winds as before, at S. S. E. We reckoned by a W. S. W.
way forty fiveleagues. At noon the wind was something
fallen, and then we had some rain.


114

Page 114

The 19th we had both cloudy and windy weather. My
reckoning was a S. W. by S. way, and here upon fifty eight
miles. Yesterday we were assured by our Pilot, that we
were now in the Meridian of the Island of Juan Fernandez,
whither our course was directed for that present. What
occasioned him to be so positive in his assertion, was the

Great birds
seen again.
seeing of those great birds, of which we made mention in
the foregoing Chapter.

On the 20th, we had cloudy weather in the morning
on both tacks. We made a S. W. and half S. way, and by
it fifty two leagues. By observation we found this day
Lat. 32 D. 20 S. Difference of Meridian was now one
hundred and twenty three leagues.

The next day likewise we had cloudy weather; yet by
observation we found a W. way. On the 22d by observation
we found and F. way proved.

Thursday, December the 23d. All the night past we

They descry
land.
had a fresh wind. But in the morning, from top-mast
head, we descryed a hammock of land. In the evening
we saw it again. We found afterwards that what we had
seen, was the Westermost Island of Juan Fernandez; which
is nothing else but a meer rock, there being no riding, nor
scarce landing, near unto it.

Fryday, December the 24th. This morning we could

They see the
Iesl of
Juan
Fernandez.
descry the Island it self, of Juan Fernandez, S. by E. it being
at sixteen leagues distance when we saw it yesterday.
At seven this morning the Island stood E. the wind being at
N. W. by N. At eight the same morning, the Island, at
the distance of five leagues, little more or less, appeared
thus.


115

Page 115
[ILLUSTRATION]

Isla de JUAN FERNANDEZ.

Here my observation was, that I could see neither fowl

A particular
observation.
nor fish nigh unto this Island; both which things are usually
to be seen about other Islands. Having told my observation
unto our Pilot, he gave me for answer, that he had
made many Voyages by this Island, and yet never saw any
either fowl or fish more than I. Our reckoning this day
was an E. S. E. way, and hereby thirty six leagues. Our
latitude by observation was found to be 33 D. 30 S.

Saturday, December the 25th. Yesterday in the afternoon,
at three of the clock, we saw the other Island, making
two or three hammocks of land. This morning we were
about eight leagues distant from it, the Island bearing E. S.
E. from us. At eight the same morning, we were right
at breast with it. Here therefore are two Islands together,
the biggest whereof is three leagues and an half in length,

Bigness of these
Isles.
nearest N. W. and S.E. the other, and lesser, is almost one
league, and no more in circumference. At ten of the clock
we sent off from the ship one of our Canoa's, to seek for the
best landing and anchoring for our Vessel. As we approached,
both Islands seemed unto us nothing but one entire
heap of rocks. That which lyeth more unto the N.
is the highest, though we could not now see the tops thereof
for the clouds which covered it. In most places it is so
steep, that it becometh almost perpendicular.


116

Page 116

Christmas-day.
This day being Christmas-day, we gave in the morning
early three Vollies of shot, for solemnization of that great
Festival. I reckoned an E. by S. way. By a clear observation
from the middle of the Island, I found here Lat. 33
D. 45 S. and M. D. to be ninty nine leagues. In the evening
of this day, we came to an anchor at the South end
of the Island, in a stately Bay that we found there, but
which lyeth open from the South, to the South-East winds.
We anchored in the depth of eleven fathom water, and at
the distance of onely one furlong from the shoar. Here we
Many Seals.
saw multitudes of Seals covering the Bay every where, insomuch
that we were forced to kill them, to set our feet
on shoar.

Sunday, December the 26th. This day we sent a Canoa
to see if we could find any riding secure from the Southerly
winds; these being the most constant winds that
blow on these Coasts. The Canoa being gone, our Commander
sent likewise what men we could spare on shoar,

They kill
Goats.
to drive Goats, whereof there is great plenty in this Island.
They caught and killed that day to the number of threescore,
or thereabouts. The Canoa returning unto the ship,
made report that there was good riding in another Bay, situate
on the North side of the Island, in fourteen fathom
water, and not above one quarter of a mile from the shoar.
Moreover that there was much wood to be had, whereas
in the place where we had first anchored, not one stick of
wood nor tuft of grass was to be found.

The next day, being the 27th, between two and four of

A great storm
the clock in the morning, we had a tempest of violent winds
and fierce showers of rain. The same day we got in two
hundred jars of water, bringing them the full distance of a
They take in
water.
league from the place of our riding. In the mean while, others
were employed to catch Goats, as they had done the
day before.

On the 28th of the said month, in the morning I went
with ten more of our company, and two Canoas, to fetch
water from the land. Being come thither, and having filled


117

Page 117
our jars, we could not get back unto the ship, by reason
of a Southerly wind that blew from off the Ocean, and
The Author in
great danger.
hindred our return. Thus we were forced to lie still in
a water-hole, and wait till the wind were over for a safer
opportunity. Mean while, the violence of the wind encreasing,
our ship was forced to get under sail, and make away,
not without danger of being forced ashoar. Hereupon
she sailed out of the harbour, to seek another place of
anchoring. At noon I ventured out, to try if I could follow
the ship, but was forced in again by the wind and a raging
sea. Thus we lay still for some while longer, till the
evening came on. This being come, we ventured out again
both Canoa's together: but the winds were then so
high, that we were forced to throw all our jarrs of water
over-board to lighten our boats, otherwise we had inevitably
perished. I ought to bless and praise God Almighty
for this deliverance; for in all humane reason, the least
wave of that tempest must have sunk us. Notwithstanding,
we came that night to our place or harbour, where
we expected to have found our ship (called False wild harbour)
but found her not. Hereupon not knowing what to
do, we went ashoar, and halled up our Canoa's dry. Having
done this, we ascended higher within the Island, along
a Gulley, for the space of half a mile, there to clear our
selves of the noise and company of the Seals which were
Multitudes of
Seales.
very troublesome on the shoar. Here we kindled a fire,
and dryed our clothes, and rested our selves all night,
though with extream hungry bellies, as having eaten very
litte or nothing all the day before. In the sides of the hill,
under which we lay, we observed many holes like Coneyholes.
These holes are the nests and roosting-places of
multitudes of birds that breed in this Island, called by the
Spaniards, Pardelas. One of these birds, as we lay drying
Pardelas.
and warming our selves, fell down into our fire.

The next morning being come, very early before Sunrise,
we went farther to the Northward, to seek for our ship
which we feared we had lost. But we were not gone far,


118

Page 118
when we soon espied her at sea. Hereupon we passed a
point of land, and entered a certain Bay, which was about a
mile deep, and not above half a league over. Into this Bay
we put, and instantly made a fire, thereby to shew the ship
whereabouts we were. Here we found good watering and
wooding close unto the shoar. In this Bay also we saw another
sort of amphibious Animal, the which I imagined
Description of
a Sea-Lyon.
to be the same, that by some Authors is called a Sea-Lyon.
These Animals are six times bigger than Seals. Their heads
are like unto that of a Lyon, and they have four fins not
unlike unto a Tortoise. The hinder parts of these Creatures
are much like fins, but are drawn after them, as being
useless upon the shoar. They roared as if they had been
Lyons, and were full of a certain short and thick hair, which
was of a Mouse colour; but that of the young ones was
something lighter. The old ones of these Sea-Lyons are
between twelve and fourteen foot long, and about eleven
or twelve foot in thickness, or circumference. A Seal is
very easily killed, as we often experimented, but two of
our men with great stones could not kill one of these Animals.

The ship forced
to sea twice or
thrice.
That day in the afternoon there came a Canoa from on
board the ship with Provision for us, they fearing least
we should be starved. In like manner the Lanch came
with men to cut wood. They told us that the ship came
to an Anchor in the other Bay, but that within half an
hour the Cable broke, and they were forced to leave their
Anchor behind them and get out to Sea again. Night being
come, we made our beds of Fern, whereof there is huge
plenty upon this Island; together with great multitudes of
Trees like unto our English Box, the which bore a sort of
green Berries, smelling like unto Pimiento, or Pepper. All
this day the ship was forced to ply off at Sea, not being
able to get in.

December the thirtieth. The morning of this day we
employed in filling water, and cutting down wood. But
in the afternoon, eight of us eleven, went aboard the ship,


119

Page 119
all in one and the same Canoa, sending her ashoar again with
Provisions for the men that were there. This day in like
manner we could not get into the Harbour, for no sooner
the ship came within the parts of Land, but the wind comeing
out of the Bay, blew us clear out again. Thus we were
forced to ply out all that night, and great part of the following
day.

On the next day having overcome all difficulties, and

They get the
ship in again.
many dangers, we came to an Anchor in the afternoon, in
fifteen fathom water, at the distance of a Cable length
from shoar. Here it was observable, that we were forced
to keep men ashoar on purpose to beat off the Seals, mean
while our men filled water at the Sea side, at high-water
mark, for as much as that the Seals covet hugely to lye in
fresh water. About this Island fish is so plentiful, that in
less then one hours time, two men caught enough for all
our whole company.

Saturday January the first, 1680. This day we put up

Craw-fish.
a new Main-top, larger then the old one; and we caught
Craw-fish that were bigger than our English Lobsters.

The next day being January the second, dyed a chief man

The death of
the Master of
the ship.
of our company, whose name was John Hilliard. This
man until our weighing Anchor from the Port of Coquimbo,
had been our Master all the space of this Voyage. But
from that time we chose John Cox for the Starboard, and
John Fall for the Larboard watch. The disease whereof he
dyed was the Dropsie. That evening we buryed our
dead Companion, and gave him a Volley for his Funeral,
according to the usual custom.

On the third of January we had terrible gusts of wind

A man liveth
five years alone.

from the shoar every hour. This day our Pilot told us,
that many years ago a certain ship was cast away upon this
Island, and onely one man saved, who lived alone upon
the Island five years before any ship came this way to carry
him off. The Island hath excellent Land in many Valleys
belonging thereunto. This day likewise we fetched
our Anchor which we left in the other Bay when the ship
broke her Cable.


120

Page 120

New dangers
of the ship.
Tuesday January the fourth, 1680. This day we had
such terrible flaws of wind, that the Cable of our ship
brake, and we had undoubtedly been on shoar, had not the
other held us fast. At last it came home and we drove
outward. By the way it caught hold of a Rock, and held
some time, but at last we haled it up, and the wind came
A great storm.
with so much violence, that the waves flew as high as our
Main-top, and made all the water of a foam.

They drive again.

January the fifth, the same huge gusts of wind continued
all the night last past, which notwithstanding this day
at noon it was brave and calme. But in the morning the
Anchor of our ship gave way again, and we drove to the
Eastward more than half a mile, till at last we hapned to
fasten again in the depth of sixty fathom water. Here in
this Bay where we rid at Anchor, did run a violent current,
sometimes into, and at other times out of the Bay; so that
all was uncertain with us. But our greatest discomfort
The men begin
to mutiny.
was, that our men were all in a mutiny against each other,
and much divided among themselves. Some of them being
for going home towards England, or our Forreign Plantations,
& that round about America through the Straights
of Magallanes, as Captain Sawkins had designed to do;
others of them being for staying longer, and searching
farther into those Seas, till such time as they had got more
They remove to
another Bay.
Money. This day at noon our Anchor drove again; whereupon
to secure our selves from that dangerous place, we
sailed from thence into the West Bay, and anchored there
in twenty five fathom water, and moored our ship one
quarter of a mile from shoar.

On Thursday January the sixth, our dissentions being

The Mutineers
make a new
Commander.
now grown unto a great heighth, the Mutineers made a
new Election of another person to be our chief Captain
and Commander, by vertue whereof they deposed Captain
Sharp, whom they protested they would obey no
longer. They chose therefore one of our company, whose
name was John Watling, to command in chief, he having
been an old Privateer, and gained the esteem of being a

121

Page 121
stout Seaman. The election being made, all the rest were
forced to give their assent unto it, and Captain Sharp gave
over his command, whereupon they immediately made
Articles with Watling, and signed them.

The following day being the seventh, we burnt and tal-

Cook put in
Irons.
lowed the star-board side of our ship. In this Bay where
we now anchored, we found a Cross cut in the Bark of a
Tree, and several Letters besides. Hereupon, in another
Tree up the Gulley, I engraved the two first Letters of my
name, with a Cross over them. This day likewise William
Cook,
servant unto Captain Edmund Cook, confessed that
his Master had oft times Buggered him in England, leaving
his Wife and coming to bed to him the said William. That
the same crime he had also perpetrated in Jamaica; and
once in these Seas before Panama. Moreover, searching
his Writings, we found a paper with all our names written
in it, the which it was suspected he designed to have given
unto the Spanish prisoners. For these reasons, this evening
our Captain thought it convenient to put him in Irons,
which was accordingly done. The next day unto the above-mentioned
in this Paragraph, we finished the other
side of our ship.

Sunday January the ninth, this day was the first Sunday
that ever we kept by command and common consent,

Sundays ordered
to be kept.
since the loss and death of our valiant Commander Captain
Sawkins. This generous spirited man threw the dice
over board, finding them in use on the said day.

January the Tenth, this day the weather was very clear

Great plenty
of fish.
and setled again. We caught every day in this Bay, where
we now were, great plenty of fish; and I saw the same
day a shoal of fish a mile and more long.

On the next day being the eleventh, we filled our wa-

water and
wood taken in
ter, and carryed our wood on board the ship. Moreover,
our two Canoas went to the other side of the Island to
catch Goats, for on the barren side thereof are found and
caught the best; and by Land it is impossible to go from
one side of the Island to the other.


122

Page 122

They espy three
men of war.
Wednesday January the twelfth, this morning our Canoas
returned from catching of Goats, firing of Guns as
they came towards us to give us warning. Being come on
board, they told us, they had espied three sail of ships, which
they conceived to be men of War coming about the Island.
Within half an hour after this notice given by our Boats,
the ships came in sight to Leeward of the Island. Hereupon
we immediately slipt our Cables, and put to Sea, taking
all our men on board that were ashoar at that time.
Onely one William a Mosquito Indian, was then left behind
upon the Island, because he could not be found at this our
suddain departure. Upon the Island of Juan Fernandez
do grow certain Trees that are called by the name of Bilby-
Cabbage-trees.
trees. The tops of these trees are excellent Cabbage, and
of them is made the same use that we do of Cabbage in
England. Here fish aboundeth in such quantity, that on
the surface of the water I have taken fish with a bare and
naked hook, that is to say, unbaited. Much fish is taken
here of the weight of twenty pound; the smallest that is
taken in the Bay being almost two pound weight. Very
good Timber for building of Houses and other uses, is likewise
found upon this Island. It is distant from the Main
Continent the space of ninety five Leagues, or thereabouts,
being situate in 33 d. 40 South. The plats of the Islands
lye N. W. and S. E.

Being got out of the Bay we stood off to Sea, and kept
to windward as close as we could. The biggest of these

Strength of the
men of war.
Spanish men of War, for such they proved to be, was of
the burthen of eight hundred Tuns, and was called El Santo
Christo,
being mounted with twelve Guns. The second
named San Francisco, was of the port of six hundred Tuns,
and had ten guns. The third was of the carriage of three
hundred and fifty Tuns, whose name I have forgot. As
soon as they saw us, they instantly put out their bloody
flags, and we, to shew them that we were not as yet daunted,
did the same with ours. We kept close under the
wind, and were, to confess the truth, very unwilling to

123

Page 123
fight them, by reason they kept all in a knot together, and
we could not single out any one of them, or separate him
from the rest. Especially considering, that our present
Commander Watling had shewed himself at their appearance
to be faint hearted. As for the Spaniards themselves,
they might have easily come unto us, by reason we lay by
several times: but undoubtedly they were cowardly given,
and peradventure as unwilling to engage us, as we
were to engage them.

The following day being January the thirteenth, in the
morning we could descry one of the fore-mentioned men
of war, under the Leeward side of the Island; and we believed
that the rest were at Anchor thereabouts. At W. by
S. and at the distance of seven Leagues the Island appeareth
thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isle of Juan Fernandez.

Lat. 33 d. 40 South.

At noon that day we stood in towards the Island, ma-

They gave
then the ship.
king as if that we intended to be in with them. But in the
afternoon our Commander propounded the question unto
us, whether we were willing now that the Fleet was to
windward, to bare away from them? Unto this we all agreed
with one consent. And hereupon, night being come,
with a fresh wind at S.S.E. we stood away N.E. by N. and
thus gave them handsomly the slip, after having out braved
them that day, and the day before.


124

Page 124
[ILLUSTRATION]

125

Page 125

CHAP. XVI.

The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Juan Fernandez,
unto that of Yqueque. Here they take
several Prisoners, and learn intelligence of the
posture of affairs at
Arica. Cruelty committed
upon one of the said prisoners, who had rightly
informed them. They attempt
Arica the second
time, and take the Town, but are beaten out of it
again before they could plunder, with great loss
of men, many of them being killed, wounded,
and made Prisoners. Captain
Watling their
chief Commander is killed in this Attacque, and
Captain
Sharp presently chosen again, who leadeth
them off, and tbrough Mountains of difficulties,
maketh a bold Retreat unto the ship.

HAving bid our enemies adieu, after the manner as was

They leave the
Isle of
J. Fernandez.

said in the precedent Chapter, the next morning
being January the 14th. we bore N. E. We reckoned this
day a N. N. E. one quarter South way, and by it, thirty
Leagues. We were four Leagues Eastward from the Isle of
Juan Fernandez, when I took our departure.

Saturday Jauuary the 15th, we had hasey weather. This
day we made by a N. E. by N. way eleven Leagues. The
same hasey weather continued in like manner the 16th.
But about ten that morning the wind dyed away. Our
reckoning was a N.E. by N. way, and thirty six Leagues.

On the 17th we had a soft gale, and a clear observation.
We found by it Lat. 28 d. 47 S. Easting seventy
Leagues. The next day we had likewise a clear day, and


126

Page 126
we reckoned by a N. E. by N. way, thirty one leagues. By
observation Lat. 27 d. 29 South.

They resolve
for
Arica.
Wednesday January the 19th, we had a clear day, as
before, and reckoned a N. E. by N. way, and thirty five
Leagues and two thirds. By observation we took Lat. 25
d. 00. South. This day we put up our top-gallant masts
and sails, the which we had taken down at the Island of
Juan Fernandez, when we thought to have gone directly
from thence for the Straights of Magallanes. But now our
resolutions were changed, and our course was bent for Arica,
that rich place, the second time, to try what good we
could do upon it by another attempt, in order to the making
all our fortunes there. In the evening of this day we
saw Land at a great distance.

They descry
la d.
January the 20th, about midnight past we had a small
Land-wind that sprang up and reached us. At break of
day we could descry Land again, at the distance of nine or
ten Leagues more or less. This day was very hot and
calme, Easting ninety two Leagues.

On the 21. we had very little wind, and all along as we
went we could descry high land, and that barren. We sailed
N. by E. and N.N.E. along the Coast of the Continent.

They look out
for
Yqueque.
The next day being Saturday the 22 of January, we
had very hot weather. This day we sailed N. and N. by E.
and looked out continually for the Island of Yqueque, which
our Pilot told us was hereabouts. We kept at a just distance
from Land, for fear of being descryed by the enemy.

On the following day, Sunday the 23. we sailed in like
manner N.N.E. along the Coast, which seemeth to be very
full of Bays hereabouts. By observation this day, we
took Lat. 21 d. 49. South.

They send a
Canoa to seek
the Island.
Munday January the 24th, this day we had an indifferent
gale of wind, and we stood N. and by E. the wind being
S.S.E. We found Latitude by observation 21 d. 02
South. Our whole Easting I reckoned to be ninety two
leagues and an half. In the afternoon of this day Captain

127

Page 127
Watling our Commander, and twenty five men more departed
from the ship in two Canoas, with design to seek for,
and take the Island of Yqueque, and there to gain intelligence
of the posture of affairs at Arica. We were at the
distance of twelve leagues from shoar, when they went away
from the ship.

The next day by a clear observation, we found Lat. 20

They find it
not.
d. 40 South. At four in the afternoon this day, returned
one of our Canoas, bringing word that they could not find
the Island, though they had searched for it very diligently.
At night came the other, being brought back by a wrong
sign given us by the first Canoa. This second Canoa had
landed upon the Continent, and there found a track, the
which they followed for some little space. Here they met
a dead Whale, with whose bones the Spaniards had built a
Hut, and set up a Cross. There lay also many pieces of
broken Jars. They observed likewise, that hereabouts upon
the Coast were many Bays, good landing, and anchoring
for ships. That evening about seven of the clock, a fresh
gang departed from the ship to seek for the same Island,
mean while we lay becalmed all night, driving about a
league to leeward.

Wednesday January the 26th, we had extream hot wea-

Rich Mines
on the Continent.

ther. This day the Spanish Pilot told us, that on the Continent
over against us, and at the distance of a very little
way within the Land, are many rich Mines of Silver, but
that the Spaniards dared not to open them for fear of an
Invasion from some Forreign enemy or other. We sailed
North, at the distance of about two leagues from shoar. At
noon we had an observation, and found Lat. 20 d. 21 S.
The Island is
found.
At four of the clock we saw a smoak made by our men,
close by a white clift, which proved to be the Island. Hereupon
we immediately sent away another Canoa with more
men, to supply them in their attempts. But in the mean
while the first Canoa which had departed the evening before
this day, came aboard, bringing with them four prisoners,
two old white men, and two Indians.


128

Page 128

An account of
the Island.
The other Canoa which set out last, brought back Molossus,
Fish, and two Jars of wine. To windward of the
said Island, is a small village of eighteen or twenty houses,
having a small Chappel nigh unto it, built of stone, and
for adornment thereof, it is stuck full of Hides, or the skins
of Seals. They found about fifty people in this Hamlet,
but the greatest part of them made their escape at the arrival
of the Canoa. Unto this Island do frequently come
Barks from Arica, which City is not far distant from
thence to fetch clay, and they have already transported away
a considerable part thereof. The poor Indians, Inhabitants
or Natives of this Island, are forced to bring all the
fresh water they use, the full distance of eleven leagues
from thence, that is to say, from a River name Camarones,
which lyeth to Leeward of the Island. The Barque wherein
they used to bring it, was then gone for water, when
our men landed upon the place. The Island all over is
white, but the bowels thereof are of a reddish sort of earth.
From the shoar is seen here a great path which leadeth over
the Mountains into the Country. The Indians of this
Island use to eat much and often, a sort of Leaves that are
of a tast much like unto our Bay-leaves in England. Insomuch,
that their teeth are died of a green colour, by the
continual use thereof. The Inhabitants go stark naked,
and are very robust and strong people; yet notwithstanding
they live more like beasts than men.

Their cruelty
towards an
old man.
Thursday January the 27th, this morning on board the
ship, we examined one of the old men, who were taken
prisoners upon the Island the day before. But finding him
in many Lies, as we thought, concerning Arica, our Commander
ordered him to be shot to death, which was accordingly
done. Our old Commander Captain Sharp was
much troubled in his mind and dissatisfyed at this cruelty
and rash proceeding; whereupon he opposed it as much
as he could. But seeing he could not prevail, he took wa-
Sharp troubled
at it.
terand washed his hands, saying, Gentlemen, I am clear of
the blood of this old man; and I will warrant you a hot day


129

Page 129
for this piece of cruelty, whenever we come to fight at Arica.
These words were found at the latter end of this expedition
of Arica, to contain a true and certain prophesie, as shall
be related hereafter.

The other old man being under examination, informed

Another prisoner
examined.
us, that the Island of Tqueque afore-mentioned, belonged
unto the Governour of Arica, who was Proprietor thereof;
and that he allowed unto these men a little wine, and other
Necessaries, to live upon for their sustenance. That he
himself had the superintendance of forty or fifty of the
Governours slaves, who caught fish and dryed it, for the
profit of the said Governour; and he sold it afterwards to
the inland Towns, and reaped a considerable benefit thereby.
That by a Letter received from Arica, eight days
ago, they understood there was then in the Harbour of Arica,
three ships from Chile, and one Bark. That they had
raised there a Fortification mounted with Twelve Copper
Guns. But that when we were there before, they had conveyed
out of the Town unto the neighbouring stantions,
all their Plate, Gold, and Jewels, burying it there in the
ground, and concealing it after several manners and ways.
The which whether it were now returned or not, he could
not easily tell. That there were two great places, the one
at ten, the other at twenty five leagues distance from Arica,
at which Towns lay all their strength and treasure. That
the day before had passed a Post to declare our having been
at Coquimbo. That the Embargo laid on all vessels going
to the Northward, was now taken off; so that a free passage
was allowed them. That by Land it was impossible
to go from hence unto Arica in less than four or five days,
for as much as they must carry water for themselves and
Horses for the whole journey. At last, that those Arms
that were brought from Lima unto Arica, as was mentioned
above, were now carryed away from thence unto Buenos
Ayres.
All these things pleased us mighty well to hear
them. But however, Captain Sharp was still much dissatisfyed,
by reason we had shot the old man. For he had

130

Page 130
given us information to the full, and with all manner of
truth, how that Arica was greatly fortified, and much
more than before; but our misfortune was, that we took
his information to be all contrary to the truth.

The leaves of which we made mention above, are

They take the
Barque of the
Island.
brought down unto this Island in whole Bales, and then
distributed unto the Indians by a short allowance given to
each man. This day we had very hot weather, and a S.
W. Sea. By observation we found Lat. 20 d. 13 South.
Besides the things above-mentioned, our prisoners informed
us, that at Arica the Spaniards had built a breast-work
round about the Town; and one also in every street, that
in case one end of the Town were taken, they might be able
to defend the other. We stood off and in for the greatest
part of this day. In the afternoon we were eight
leagues and an half distant from shoar, with a fresh wind.
That morning moreover we took the Barque that was at
the River of Camarones, to fill water for the Island.

Friday January the 28th, last night about midnight we

They embark
in the Boats
for
Arica.
lest the ship, and embarked our selves in the Barque aforementioned,
the Lanch, and four Canoas, with design to take
Arica by surprizal. We rowed and sailed all night, making
in for the shoar.

Saturday January the 29th, about break of day this day,

They lye hidden
by day.
we got under shoar, and there hid our selves among the
Rocks for all the day long, fearing lest we should be descryed
by the enemy, before we came to Arica. At this
time we were about five leagues to Southward of Arica,
nigh Quebrada de San Vitor, a place so called upon that
Coast. Night being come, we rowed away from thence.

Sunday January the 30th, 1680. this day (being the day

They land and
attaque the
Town.
that is consecrated in our English Kalendar, unto the Martyrdom
of our glorious King Charles the First) in the
morning about Sun-rise, we landed amongst some Rocks, at
the distance of four miles, more or less, to the Southward
from Arica. We put on shoar ninety two men in all, the
rest remaining in the Boats, to keep and defend them from

131

Page 131
being surprized by the enemy, to the intent we might
leave behind us a safe retreat, in case of necessity. Unto
these men we left strict orders, that if we made one smoak
from the Town, or adjoyning fields, they should come after
us towards the harbour of Arica with one Canoa; but
in case we made two, that they should bring all away,
leaving only fifteen men in the Boats. As we marched from
our landing place towards the Town, we mounted a very
steep hill, and saw from thence no men, nor Forces of the
enemy; which caused us to hope we were not as yet descryed,
and that we should utterly surprize them. But
when we were come about half of the way unto the Town,
we espied three horsemen, who mounted the Look-out hill;
and seeing us upon our march, they rid down full speed
towards the City, to give notice of our approach. Our
Commander Watling chose out forty of our number, to
attaque the Fort, and sent us away first thitherwards, the
They assault
the Fort.
rest being designed for the Town. We that were appointed
for the Fort, had ten hand Granadoes among us, when we
gave the assault, and with them, as well as with our other
Arms, we attacked the Castle, and exchanged several shot
with our enemies. But at last, seeing our main body in
danger of being overborn with the number of our enemies,
we gave over that attempt on the Fort, and ran down
in all hast unto the valley, to help and assist them in the
fight. Here the Battel was very desperate, and they killed
three, and wounded two more of our men from their
out-works, before we could gain upon them. But our rage
encreasing with our wounds, we still advanced, and at last
beat the enemy out of all, and filled every street in the
City with dead bodies. The enemy made several retreats
The Town taken.

unto several places, from one breast-work to another; and
we had not a sufficient number of men wherewith to man
all places taken. Insomuch, that we had no sooner beat
them out of one place, but they came another way, and
man'd it again with new Forces and fresh men.


132

Page 132

Many prisoners
We took in every place where we vanquished the enemy,
great number of Prisoners, more indeed, then peradventure
we ought to have done, or we knew well what to
do withal; they being too many for such a small body as
ours was to manage. These prisoners informed us, that
we had been descryed no less than three days before, from
the Island of Yqueque, whereby they were in expectation of
our arrival every hour, as knowing we had still a design
to make a second attempt upon that place. That into the
City were come four hundred Souldiers from Lima, the
which, besides their own, had brought seven hundred Arms
for the use of the Country-people; and that in the Town
they had six hundred armed men, and in the Fort three
hundred.

The Fort standeth
out.
Being now in possession of the City, or the greatest part
thereof, we sent unto the Fort, commanding them to surrender.
But they would not vouchsafe to send us any answer.
Hereupon we advanced towards it, and gave it a second
Attaque, wherein we persisted very vigorously for
a long time. Being not able to carry it, we got upon the
top of a house that stood nigh unto it, and from thence fired
down into the Fort, killing many of their men, and
wounding them at our ease and pleasure. But mean while
we were busyed in this Attaque, the rest of the enemies Forces
had taken again several Posts of the Town, and began
to surround us in great numbers, with design to cut us off.
The Spaniards
rally against
them.
Hereupon we were constrained to desist the second time, as
before, from assaulting the Fort, and make head against
them. This we no sooner had done, but their numbers
and vigour increasing every moment, we found our selves
to be overpowred, and consequently we thought it convenient
to retreat unto the plaee where our wounded men
were, under the hands of our Surgeons, that is to say, our
Hospital. At this time our new Commander Captain
Watling killed
and many
others.
Watling, both our Quartermasters, and a great many others
of our men were killed, besides those that were wounded
and disabled to fight. So that now the enemy rallying

133

Page 133
against us, and beating us from place to place, we were
in a very distracted condition, and in more likelihood to
perish every man, than escape the bloodiness of that day.
Now we found the words of Captain Sharp to bear a true
prophesie, being all very sensible, that we had had a day too
hot for us, after that cruel heat in killing and murdering
in cold blood, the old Mestizo Indian whom we had taken
prisoner at Yqueque, as before was mentioned.

Being surrounded with difficulties on all sides, and in

Sharp is chosen
anew.
great disorder, as having no head nor leader to give orders
for what was to be done, we were glad to turn our eyes
unto our good and old Commander Captain Bartholomew
Sharp,
and beg of him very earnestly to commiserate our
condition, and carry us off. It was a great while that we
were reiterating our supplications unto him, before he would
take any notice of our request in this point. So much
was he displeased with the former mutiny of our people against
him, all which had been occasioned by the instigation
of Mr. Cook. But Sharp is a man of an undaunted
courage, and of an excellent conduct, not fearing in the
least to look an insulting enemy in the face, and a person
that knoweth both the Theory and practical parts of Navigation,
as well as most do. Hereupon, at our request and
earnest petition, he took upon him the command in chief
They retreat
with great
difficulty.
again, and began to distribute his orders for our safety.
He would have brought off our Surgeons, but that they
had been drinking in the mean while that we assaulted
the Fort, and thus would not come with us when they were
called. They killed and took of our number twenty
eight men, besides eighteen more that we brought off, who
were desperately wounded. At this time we were all extream
faint for want of water and victuals, whereof we
had had none all that day. Moreover, we were almost
choaked with the dust of the Town; this being so much
raised by the work that their great Guns had made, that
we could scarcely see each other. They beat us out of the
Town, and then followed us into the Savanas, or open fields,

134

Page 134
still charging us as fast as they could. But when they saw
that we rallyed again, resolving to dye one by another,
they then ran from us into the Town, and sheltred themselves
under their breast-works. Thus we retreated in as
good order as we could possibly observe in that confusion.
But their Horsemen followed us as we retired, and fired at
us all the way, though they would not come within reach
of our Guns; for their own reached farther then ours, and
out-shot us more than one third. We took the sea-side for
our greater security; the which when the enemy saw, they
betook themselves unto the Hills, rowling down great
stones, and whole Rocks to destroy us. In the mean while
those of the Town examined our Surgeons, and other men
whom they had made prisoners. These gave them our
signs that we had left unto our Boats that were behind us,
so that they immediately blew up two smoaks, which were
perceived by the Canoas. This was the greatest of our
dangers. For had we not come at that instant that we
did, unto the sea-side, our Boats had been gone, they being
already under sail, and we had inevitably perished every
man. Thus we put off from the shoar, and got on
board about ten of the clock at night, having been involved
in a continual and bloody fight with the enemy all
that day long.


135

Page 135

CHAP. XVII.

A description of the Bay of Arica. They sail
from hence unto the Port of
Guasco, where
they get Provisions. A draught of the said
Port. They land again at
Hilo to revenge
the former affronts, and took what they could
find.

HAving ended our attempt at Arica, the next day, be-

They depart
from
Arica.
ing January the last, we plyed to and fro in sight of
the Port, to see if they would send out the three ships we
had seen in the Harbour to fight us. For upon them we
hoped to revenge the defeat and disappointment we had
received at the Town the day before. But our expectations
in this point also were frustrated, for not one of those
vessels offered to stir.

The houses of this Town of Arica are not above eleven

An account of
Arica.
foot high, as being built of earth, and not of brick or
timber. The Town it self is foursquare in figure, and
at one corner thereof standeth the Castle, which may easily
be commanded even with small Arms, from the hill
which lyeth close unto it. This place is the Embarcadero,
or Port-Town of all the Mineral Towns that lye hereabouts,
and hence is fetched all the Plate that is carryed to
Lima, the head-City of Peru. I took the Bay of Arica as
it appeared to me thus.


136

Page 136
[ILLUSTRATION]

137

Page 137

On Tuesday February the first, we had a clear observation,
and by it we found Lat. 19 d. 06. South. This day

They make a
small dividend
we shared the old remains of our Plate, taken in some of
our former booties. Our shares amounted only unto thirty
seven pieces of Eight to each man.

N. B. Here I would have my Reader to take notice, that
from this day forwards, I kept no constant
Diary or Journal,
as I had done before, at least for some considerable space of
time, as you shall see hereafter; my disease and sickness at Sea
being the occasion of intermitting what I had never failed to
do in all the course of this Voyage till now. Only some few

Memorandums, as my weakness gave leave, I now and then
committed to paper, the which I shall give you as I find them,
towards a continuance of this History. Thus:

Munday February the 14th, this night between eleven

Captain Cooks
man dyeth.
add twelve of the clock dyed on board our ship William
Cook,
who was the servant afore-mentioned unto Captain
Edmund Cook, of whom likewise mention hath been often
made in this Journal. He desisted not in the least, even
at his last hour, to accuse his Master of Buggering him, as
before was related. Moreover, that his Master should
say, It was no sin to steal from us, who thought it none to rob the
Spaniards.

February the 16th, 1680. this day we found our selves
to be in Lat. 27 d. 30 South. We had a constant breeze at
S. E. and S. S. E. till we got about two hundred Leagues
from land. Then at the Eclipse of the Moon, we had a

Several calms.
a calm for two or three days: and then a breeze at North
for the space of two days; after which we had a calm again
for two or three days more.

March the first we found Latitude by observation 34 d.
01 South. At this time beginneth the dirty weather in

Dirty weather
these Seas. We lay under a pair of courses, the wind being
at S. E. and E. S. E. with a very great Sea at S.S.E.

March the third, all hands were called up, and a Councel
held; wherein considering it was now dirty weather, and

They resolve to
go home over
land.
late in the year, we bore up the Helm, and resolved to go

138

Page 138
unto the Main for water, and thence to Leeward, and so
march over land towards home, or at least to the North
Sea. But God directed us from following this resolution,
as you shall hear hereafter. We being thus determined that
day, we stood N.E. with a strong wind at S.E. and E.S.E.

On March the fifth dyed our Coquimbo Indian. The seventh
we had a west-wind, our course being E. by N. The

Are put to an
allowance.
eighth of the said Month we were put to an allowance,
having only one Cake of bread a day. March the tenth we
had a strong South-wind.

They descry
land.
On March the 12th we fell in with the main land, something
to Leeward of Coquimbo. Within the Island of Pax-
Furnaces of
Copper.
aros are double lands, in whose Valleys are fires for the
melting of Copper, with which Metal these Hills abound.
Off to sea-board it is a rocky land, and within it is sandy.
About the distance of eight Leagues to Leeward is a rocky
point with several Keys or Rocks about it. About one
half mile to Leeward of this point turneth in the Port of
Point of Guasco.

Guasco. Right against the anchoring are three Rocks, close
under the shoar.

They land.
Being arrived here, we landed on shoar threescore men
of our company, with design to get Provisions, and any
thing else that we could purchase. The people of the
Country ran all away as soon as they saw us. There was
building on shoar in this Port, a fire-Barque of sixteen or
eighteen Tuns burthen, with a Cock-boat belonging unto
And get Provisions.

it. We took one Indian Prisoner; and with him went up
the space of six or seven miles into the Country, unto an
Indian Town of Threescore or Fourscore houses. From
thence we came back unto the Church, which is distant four
miles from the Sea-side, and lodged there all night. Here
are multitudes of good Sheep and Goats in the Countrey
adjoyning to this Port, and it is watered with an excellent
fresh-water River; but the getting of water is very difficult,
the banks being very high, or otherwise inaccessible.
However, we made a shift to get in five hundred Jars of
water. Furthermore, we brought away one hundred and

139

Page 139
twenty Sheep, and fourscore Goats, with which stock we
victualled our vessel for a while. As for Oxen, they had
driven them away farther up into the Countrey. The ju-
An account of
Guasco.
risdiction of Guasco it self is governed by a Teniente, or
Deputy-Governour, and a Fryar, and is in subjection unto the
City of la Serena above-mentioned, as being a dependance
thereupon. Here groweth both Corn, Pease, Beans, and
several other sorts of Grain; and for Fruits, this place is
not inferiour unto Coquimbo. Here we found likewise a
Mill to grind Corn, and about two hundred bushels thereof
ready ground; the which we conveyed on board our
ship. Every house of any account hath branches of water
running through their yards or courts. The Inhabitants
had hidden their Wine, and other best things, as Plate,
and Jewels, having descryed us at sea before our landing:
They were descryed
before
landing.
so that our booty here, besides Provisions, was inconsiderable.
However, we caught some few Fowls, and eat five
or six Sheep, and likewise a great Hog, which tasted very
like unto our English Pork. The hills are all barren, so
that the Countrey that beareth Fruit, is only an excellent
Valley, being four times as broad as that of Hilo abovementioned.
These people of Guasco serve the Town of
Coquimbo with many sorts of Provisions. We gave the
Indian whom we had taken his liberty, and I took the Port
of Guasco thus.


144

Page 144
[ILLUSTRATION]

141

Page 141

Tuesday March the 15th, 1680. This morning we de-

They depart
from
Guasco.
parted from the Port of Guasco aforementioned, with very
little wind, having done nothing considerable there, excepting
only the taking in the few Provisions above-related.
We were bent therefore to seek greater matters, having
experimented but ill success in most of our attempts hitherto.
On March the 20th, Moro de Horse, being high doubled
Land, and at E. by N. appeared thus unto us, in Lat.
24 d. South.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Moro de Horse.

Lat. 24 d. S.

At North, and at the distance of ten Leagues, more or
less, we saw the great and high hill of Morro Moreno, being
so called from its colour. It is a dark hill, but much higher
and bigger than the other afore-mentioned, and appeareth
like unto an Island, thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Morro Moreno.

Lat. 23 d. 30 S.

We had now very dark weather all along the Coast. On


142

Page 142
Bay of Mexillones.

March the 21 we were West from the Bay of Mexillones.
The point of this Bay one League upwards, representeth
exactly a Sugar-loaf.

They seek for
the River
Loa.
March the 22. This day our Boat and Canoas went from
the ship, being well man'd, to find the River Loa. They
But cannot
find it.
went also about two Leagues to Leeward of it, unto a fishing
village, but could find no place fit for landing; whereupon
they returned without acting any thing. The next
day another Canoa of our company went out upon the
same exploit, but found the same success. Yet notwithstanding,
here Sir Francis Drake watered, and built a Church,
as we were told by our Pilot. This Church is now standing
on the Sea-side by the River, whose mouth is now dry.
There are several Huts to windward of it; and from the
said Church or Chappel goeth a great path up the hills,
which leadeth to Pica.

On Thursday March the 24th, we found Latitude by
observation, 20 d. 10 South. This day also we saw Land,
at eighteen leagues distance more or less.

Sunday March the 27th, we saw Mora de Sama, and La
cumba
at some distance. The same day we had an observation,
and found by it Lat. 18 d. 17 South. That evening
we departed from the ship with our Boats and Canoas,
towards the Coast of Hilo, upon which we now were.

They surprize
Hilo.
We landed and took the village of Hilo undiscryed, they
scarce suspecting we could have any design upon that place
the second time. We caught the Fryar who was Chaplain
unto the Town, and most of the Inhabitants asleep, making
them prisoners at war. Here we heard a flying report, as
if five thousand English had lately taken Panama the second
time, and kept it. But this rumour, as it should seem, proved
to be a falsity. At this time the River came out, and
was overflown, it being near the time of the freshes. Here
They hear of
their Surgeons
at
Arica.
the prisoners told us, that in Arica ten of our men were still
alive, whereof three were Surgeons, all the rest being dead
of their wounds. The Spaniards sent word unto Hilo, that
we had killed them seventy men, and wounded three times

143

Page 143
as many of their Forces. But here the Inhabitants said,
that of forty five men sent to the relief of Arica from
hence, there came home but only two alive. We filled
what water we pleased here; but a small boat that we
brought from Guasco broke loose from us, and was staved to
pieces on the Rocks. Here we took eighteen Jars of wine,
and good store of new Figs. On Tuesday following we
went up to the Sugar-work, mentioned in our former expedition
against Hilo, and found all Fruits just ripe, and fit
for eating. There we laded seven Mules downwards with
Molossus and Sugar. The Inhabitants told us moreover,
that those men who came to fight us when we were here
the first time, were most of them Boys, and had only fifty
Fire-arms amongst them. They being commanded by an
English Gentleman who is Married at Arequipa. Likewise
that the owner of the Sugar-work afore-mentioned was
now engaged in a Suit at Law against the Town of Hilo,
pretending it was not the English who robbed him, and
spoilt his Ingenio, when we were there before, but the
Townsmen themselves. This day in the evening we sailed
from Hilo with dark weather, and little wind, which continued
for several days afterwards.


140

Page 140

CHAP. XVIII.

They depart from the Port of Hilo, unto the Gulf
of
Nicoya, where they take down their decks,
and mend the sailing of their ship. Forty seven
of their Companions leave them, and go home over
land. A description of the Gulf of
Nicoya.
They take two Barks and some Prisoners
there. Several other remarques belonging to this
Voyage.

They leave
Hilo.
FRom the time that we set sail from the Port of Hilo,
until Sunday April the tenth, 1681. nothing hapned
unto us that might be accounted remarkable; neither did
I take any notes all this while, by reason of my indisposition
afore-mentioned. This day we could hear distinctly
the breaking of the Seas on the shoar, but could see no
land, the weather being extream dark and hasey. Notwithstanding
about noon it cleared up, and we found our
selves to be in the Bay called de Malabrigo. The land in
this Bay runneth due East and West. By an observation
made, we found this day 6 d. 35 South. We saw from
hence the Leeward Island of Lobos, or Seals, being nothing
else than a rocky and scraggy place. On the S.W. side
thereof is a red hill, which is a place about the said Island,
where the Indian Fishermen much frequent. It is situate in
Lat. 6 d. 15 S. This day likewise in the evening we saw
the Point called Aguja.

Isle of Plate.
On Saturday April the 16th, we came within a league
distance of the West-end of the Island of Plate, above des-
They mutiny again
among
themselves.
cribed. The next day unto this, being Sunday April the
17th, 1681. our Mutineers broke out again into an open

141

Page 141
dissention, they having been much dissatisfyed all along the
course of this Voyage, but more especially since our unfortunate
fight at Arica, and never entirely reconciled unto
us since they chose Captain Watling, and deposed Sharp at
the Isle of Juan Fernandez, as was related above. Nothing
now could appease them, nor serve their turn, but a separation
from the rest of the company, and a departure from
us. Hereupon this day they departed from the ship, to
Forty seven
return home.
the number of forty seven men, all in company together,
with design to go over land by the same way they came
into those Seas. The rest who remained behind, did fully
resolve, and faithfully promise to each other, they would
stick close together. They took five slaves in their company,
to guide and do them other service in that Journey.
This day we had 1 d. 30 minutes Southern Latitude. We
sailed N. N. W. before the wind.

The next day after their departure, being April the 18th,

Teey begin to
take down the
decks.
we began to go to work about taking down one of our upper
decks, thereby to cause our ship still to mend her sailing.
We now made a N. W. by N. way, and had Latitude
by observation 25 North, the wind being at S. W.

On April the 19th we made a N. W. by N. way. This
day our observation was Lat. 2 d. 45 North. In the afternoon
we had cloudy weather. The following day likewise
we made the same way, and by it seventy miles, according
to my reckoning.

On the twenty first in the morning we had some small
showers of rain, and but little wind. We saw some Turtle
upon the surface of the water, and great quantity of fish.
We caught twenty six small Dolphins. By a N. W. by N.
way, we reckoned this day forty miles.

April the 22. this day we caught seven large Dolphins,

Dolphins
caught.
and one Bonito. We saw likewise whole multitudes of
Turtle swimming upon the water, and took five of them.
We had an observation that gave us Lat. 5 d. 28 North.
Hereabouts runneth a great and strong current. This day
we lowered the quarter deck of our ship, and made it even
unto the upper deck.


142

Page 142

They save water
from the
rain that fell.
The following day we had but small wind, and yet great
showers of rain. Hereupon every man saved water for
himself, and a great quantity was saved for the whole
company. In the morning of this day we caught eight
Bonitos, and in the evening ten more.

On April the 24th we had both cloudy and rainy weather.
By an observation we had Lat. 7 d. 37 North.
Meridian difference was ninety two Leagues. This morning
we caught forty Bonitos, and in the evening thirty more.
In the afternoon we stood North, the wind being at S. W.
by S.

Isla del Cano.
Munday April the 25th, all the night before this day,
we had huge gusts of wind and rain. At break of day
we were close in with Land, which upon examination proved
to be the Island of Cano. To westward thereof is very
high land. About noon this day it cleared up, and we
had Lat. 8 d. 34 N. In the evening we sent a Canoa to
search the Island. In it they found good water, and even
ground, but withal, an open road. At night we stood off
the first watch, and the last we had a land wind.

They anchor
here.
The next day following, at day light we stood in, and
about noon we came to an anchor at the East side of the
Island afore-mentioned, which is not in breadth above one
league over. In the afternoon we removed from our former
anchoring place, and anchored again within shot of
the N. E. point of the Island. In this place groweth great
Cacao-trees.
number of Cacao trees, all over the greatest part of the
Isle. On the North side thereof are many Rivulets of good
What else they
found.
water to be found in sandy bays. We saw moreover some
good Hogs on shoar, whereof we killed one and two pigs.
Here are great numbers of Turtle-doves, and huge store
of fish, but withal, very shye to be caught. To Northward
of the Island it looketh thus.


143

Page 143
[ILLUSTRATION]

Isla del Cano.

Lat. 8 d. 45 N.

April the 27th, we had some rain and wind the forepart
of the day; but the afternoon was fair. The next day

They depart
from the Isle of

Cano.
in like manner we had great quantity of rain. On Saturday
the 30th, about seven of the clock in the morning we
weighed from the aforesaid Island with little wind, and
stood N. W. That day fell much rain with great thunder
and lightning.

Munday, May the 2d. This day we observed and found
Lat. 9 D. N. The Coast all along appeared to us very
high and mountainous, and scarce six hours did pass, but

Much thunder
and rain.
we had thunder, lightning, and rain. The like continued
for the two days following, wherein we had nothing but almost
continual thunder and rain.

On May the 5th we had an indifferent fair day. And
that evening we were right off of the Gulf of Nicoya.

Gulf of Nicoya

Friday, May the 6th. This morning we saw the Cape
very plain before us. N. by E. from it, are certain keys at
eight leagues distance, close under the Main. We steered
N. N. W. towards the biggest of them; at whose E. S. E.
side are two or three small rocks. The Main Eastward is
fine Savana, or plain and even land, through which goeth a
very great road, which is to be seen from off at Sea. At
noon the Port of Caldero, commonly called Puerto Caldero

Puerto Caldero.

bore N. from us. At which time the Ebb forced us to
found in the middle of the Gulf, where we found fourteen
fathom water. After this we anchored nearer unto the

144

Page 144
Eastern keys, in the depth of nineteen fathom, where we
had oosey ground.

Saturday, May the 7th. The night before this day was
very fair all night long. In the morning we went in a
Canoa, being several in company, to seek for a place to lay
our ship in. Amongst the Islands along the shoar, we found
many brave holes, but little or no water in them, which
caused us to dislike what we had found. On one of the
said Islands we hapned to find a hat, and many empty jarrs
of water, which shewed us that some people had been lately
there. About eight in the evening our ship weighed
anchor at young flood, and about three after noon we anchored
again in six fathom water.

Sunday, May the 8th, 1681. The night before this day,
we had much rain with thunder and lightning. The morning
being come, our Commander Captain Sharp departed
from the ship in two Canoas, with twenty two men in his
company, out of design to surprize any vessels or people
they could meet hereabouts. In the mean while, i'th'
evening we drove up with the tide (there being no wind)

They take some
prisoners, and
two barks.
in the ship, for the space of two or three leagues higher, till
that we found but three fathom high water. Here we
back't a stern. At this time we saw one of our Canoas
coming off from the Island, that was at head of us
(which was named Chira) calling for more men and arms,
and saying there was two sail of ships that were seen higher
up the Gulf. Hereupon eight of us went away with them
ashoar, whereof two joyned the party aforementioned, and
the six remaining were appointed to guard the prisoners
they had taken. Unto these we shewed our selves very
kind, as finding that they were very sensible of the cruelties
of the Spaniards towards them and their whole Nation.
Here we found to the number of eight or nine houses, and
a small Chappel standing. These people have been in former
times a considerable and great Nation, but are now almost
destroyed and extinguished by the Spaniards. We ascended
a creek of the Sea for the space of a league, or

145

Page 145
thereabouts, and took there by surprisal two Barks, which
were the two sail they had told us of before. On of these
Barks was the same we had taken before at Panama, of
which I made mention at the beginning of this History.

On Munday following this day, we weighed anchor
with our barks, and drove down the creek, with the tide at

They learn intelligence,
and
get some Spanish
Carpenters
ebb, towards our ship. The prisoners that we had taken
here, informed us, that when we were to Westward in
these Seas before, there lay one hundred men at the Port
of Santa Maria. That our men who left us at the Island
of Cayboa, as was mentioned above, met the other Bark
that we lost at Sea, as we were sailing thither, and thus all
went over land together. That in the North Seas, near
Puerto Velo, they had taken a good ship, and that for this
cause, ever since the Spaniards had kept at the mouth of the
river of Santa Maria, three Armadilla-barks, to stop and
hinder others from going that way. On Munday night
our Captain with twenty four men, went from the ship into
another creek, and there took several prisoners, among
whom was a Shipwright and his men, who were judged able
to do us good service in the altering of our ship; those
Carpenters being there actually building two great ships
for the Spaniards. Having taken these men, they made
a float of timber to bring down the Tools and Instruments
they were working withal. Here it hapned that they put
several tools, and some quantity of iron-work, into a
Doree, to be conveyed down the river with the float. But
this Doree sank by the way, as being over-laden with iron,
and one of our company, by name John Alexander a Scotch-
A Scotchman
drowned.
man, was unfortunately drowned by this means.

On Thursday following, May the 12th, we sent a Canoa
from the ship, and found the Doree that was drowned.
That evening likewise drove down the body of our drow-

He is found
and buryed.
ned man aforementioned. Hereupon we took him up,
and on Friday morning following threw him over-board,
giving him three French vollies for his customary Ceremony.

146

Page 146
Both this day and the day before, we fetched water
from a Point near the houses, on the Island of Chira aforementioned.
From the ship also we sent away a Spa-
A Merchant
sent to seek a
ransom.
nish Merchant, whom we had taken among the prisoners,
to fetch a certain number of Beeves, that might serve for a
ransom of the new bark taken here. This day the weather
was fair; but on Sunday following it rained from morning
until night.

On Munday, May the 16th, we began to work all hands

A boy runneth
away.
together on our ship. On Tuesday an Indian boy named
Peter ran away from us. He belonged unto Captain Sawkins,
and waited upon him as his Servant. On Wednesday
A slave dyeth.
died an Indian slave, whose name was Salvador. On Thursday
we heard thirty or forty guns fired on the Main,
which caused us to think that these would also turn to Hilo
Beeves. On Friday we caught cockles, which were as large
as both our fists. At night there fell such dreadful rain,
Much thunder
and rain.
with thunder, lightning, and wind, that for the space of two
hours the air was as light as day; the thunder not ceasing
all the while. On Sunday we continued to work; the
night before which day we had more thunder, lightning,
and rain.

They finish
their work.
Wednesday, May the 25th. This day we finished our
great piece of work, viz. the taking down the deck of our
ship. Besides which, the length of every mast was shortned,
and all was now serv'd and rigg'd. Insomuch that it
would seem incredible unto strangers, could they but see
They set at liberty
several
prisoners.
how much work we performed in the space of a fortnight
or less. The same day likewise we set at liberty our Spanish
Carpenters, who had been very serviceable to us all this
while; the old Pilot; the old Spaniard taken at the Isle
of Yqueque; and several others of our Spanish prisoners and
slaves. Unto these people, but chiefly unto the Spanish
Carpenters as a reward of their good service, we gave the
new Bark, which we had taken at this place. But the old
They put men
into the other
Bark.
Bark we thought fit to keep, and sail her in our company, as
we did, putting into her for this purpose six of our own

147

Page 147
men and two slaves. The next day we fell down as low as
Vanero, a place so called hereabouts, and would have sailed a-
Vanero.
way again that very evening, but that our tackle gave
way in hoisting our anchor, whereby we lay still. In the
Gulf of Nicoya we experimented most commonly a fresh
breeze, and at night a land wind.

Friday, May the 27th. This day likewise we drove down
with the tide as low as Cavallo, another place so named in
the Gulf. Here we stayed and watered that day; and

Their Interprerunneth
away.
here one Cannis Marey our Interpreter, ran away from
us.

On May the 28th in the morning we sailed from thence,
and came within twenty nine leagues of that rich and rocky
shore. Yet notwithstanding we had but seven fathom
water. Here I saw this day a white Porpus. Behind this

A white Porpus.

Island is a Town called New Cape Blanco. At Puerto Caldero
above-mentioned is but one Store-house to be seen. We
came to an anchor in the depth of seven fathom water, at
the distance of a league from shoar, and caught five Turtle.

May the 29th. This day we saw Cape Blanco. Both
this day and the day following we continued turning it
out of the Gulf, against a South wind. Here I took the
ensuing demonstration of the Gulf of Nicoya, which, for the
use of the Reader, I have hereunto annexed.


148

Page 148
[ILLUSTRATION]

149

Page 149

CHAP. XIX.

They depart from the Gulf of Nicoya, unto
Golfo Dulce, where they careen their Vessel.
An account of their sailings along the
Coast. Also a description of
Golfo Dulce.
The Spaniards force the Indians of Darien unto
a Peace, by a stratagem contrived in the name
of the
English.

WEdnesday, June the first, 1681. This day we had

They leave the
Gulf.
very fair weather, and yet withal but little wind.
Hereupon the Tide, or Current, drove us to the Westward
of Cabo Blanco. Off of this Cape, and at the distance of
two miles within the Sea, is situate a naked and nothing
but barren Key. At E. by N. and at four leagues distance,
Cape Blanco gave us this appearance.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cabo BLANCO.

Lat. 9 D. 30 N.

The Coast here along runneth N. W half W. and groweth
lower and lower towards Cape Guyones. This Cape
now mentioned, at seven leagues distance, and at N. W. by
N. appeared thus unto us.


150

Page 150
[ILLUSTRATION]

Cabo de Guyones.

Lat. 10 D. 00 N.

At first sight the Cape appeared very like unto two Islands.
The latter part of this day was cloudy, which hindred
much our prospect.

June the 2d. This morning we saw land, which appeapeared
like several Keys to us at N. W. by N. and at seven
leagues distance. It was the land of Puerto de Velas, and
appeared thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Puerto de VELAS.

They resolve to
careen, and
then cruize.
This evening our Captain called us together, and asked
our opinions concerning the course we ought to steer. Having
discussed the points by him proposed amongst us, we
all resolved to bear up for Golfo Dulce, and there to careen
our Vessels. This being done, we concluded to go from
thence unto the Cape, and cruize thereabouts under the Equinoctial.
We observed this day that our Bark taken at
the Gulf of Nicoya, sailed much better than our ship.

Friday, June the 3d. The night before this day was very
fair, and we had a fresh wind, our course being S. E.
This morning we saw no land. In the evening the wind
came about at S. S. W. and S. W. by S.


151

Page 151

June the 4th. This day we stood E. and E. by N. the
wind being W. and W. by N. In the evening we stood N.
E. and descryed land at the distance of twenty four leagues,
more or less, from Cabo Blanco.

Sunday, June the 5th. Last night we lay by for all, or
the greatest part thereof. This morning we saw the Island
of Cano above described, which bore E. S. E. from us. We
saw likewise multitudes of fish, but they would not bite.
Also Water-snakes of divers colours.

June the 6th. All the night past we had rain, and with
it but little wind. Yea, scarce enough to carry us clear
off from the Island afore mentioned. Towards morning
we had a fresh wind at N. N. W. So then we stood out S.
until morning, and this being come, we stood N. E. by E.
The land runneth from Punta Mala to Golfo Dulce, and
Punta Borrica, E. S. E. half S. At nine leagues distance we
laid the Island of Cano. And Punta Borrica at the same
distance, or thereabouts, looketh thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Punta Borrica.

Lat. 8 D. 00 N.

The West-end of Golfo Dulce is very high land, and a
high rock lye close off it. Besides which, two other
rocks lyeth farther out; the outermost of which is a mile
distant from the shoar. The East-side is also high, but
breaketh into small points and bays, growing lower and
lower to Punta Borrica. We came within the mouth of
the Gulf about the space of a mile. Then we anchored in

They anchor.
eight fathom and a half water. The mouth of the Gulf is
almost three leagues over.

The next day, being June the 7th, we weighed anchor again


152

Page 152
at young flood, and got about two leagues higher. At
evening we came again to an anchor in the depth of seven
Much rain.
fathom and a half water. It rained this day until eight of
the clock, more like the pouring down of water from the
clouds, than the usual falling of drops.

Wednesday, June the 8th, at day break we weighed anchor
again, with a fresh Sea-breeze. The higher up we
went, the deeper we found the Gulf, and at last no ground
even with thirty fathom of line. This day we sent our
Canoa away to seek water and a good place to lay our ship

They take three
prisoners.
in. Having landed, they found one Indian and two boys,
all which they made prisoners and brought aboard. Here
we used them very kindly, giving them victuals and cloaths,
for they had no other than the bark of a tree to cover
their nakedness withal. Being examined, they informed
us that a Spanish Priest had been amongst them, and had
made Peace with their Nation, ordering them strictly not
to come near any ship nor vessel that had red Colours;
forasmuch as that they were English-men, and would certainly
kill them. Being asked where now the Priest
was? they answered he was gone to a great Spanish Town,
which was distant from thence four sleeps up in the Country.
After this, the Indian left the two boys which were
his children, with us, and went to fetch more Indians unto
us, from a Plantane-walk or grove, situate by a river a
league off, or thereabouts. We came to an anchor in a
Bay close by one of the Indian Keys, where two fresh Rivers
were within a stones throw of each other, in twenty
seven fathom and a half water, and at a cables length from
the mark of low water. The Indians whom our prisoner
went to seek, came to us several times, selling unto us Honey,
Plantanes, and other necessaries that we usually bought
of them, or truckt for with other things. We also made
use of their bark-logs in tallowing our ship, in which concern
they did us good service. Their Darts are headed
with iron as sharp as any razor.


153

Page 153

Here one of the prisoners which we took at the Gulf of

A peace forced
upon the
Indians
of Darien.
Nicoya, informed us, by what means, or rather stratàgem
of War the Spaniards had forced a peace upon the Indians
of the Province of Darien, since our departure from thence.
The manner was as followeth. A certain Frenchman who
ran from us at the Island of Taboga unto the Spaniards, was
sent by them in a ship to the Rivers mouth, which disembogueth
from that Province into the South-Sea. Being arrived
there, he went ashoar by himself in a Canoa, and
told the Indians, that the English who had passed that way,
were come back from their adventures in the South-Sea.
Withal, he asked them, if they would not be so kind and
friendly unto the English men, as to come aboard and conduct
them on shoar? The poor deceived Indians were very
joyful to understand this good news; and thus forty of
the chiefest men amongst them went on board the Spanish
vessel, and were immediately carryed prisoners at War to
Panama. Here they were forced to conclude a peace, though
upon terms very disadvantageous unto them, before they
could obtain their liberty.

These poor and miserable Indians of Golfo dulce, would

They careen
their vessel.
come every day into our company, and eat and drink very
familiarly with us all the time we were there. We laid
our ship on ground, but the water did not ebb low enough
to see her keel. Mean while we were careening our vessel,
we built a house upon the shoar, both to lodge and
eat in; and every day we caught plenty of good fish. On
Sunday June the 12th, the work of Careening our ship go-
A strange accident.

ing on in due order, we came to cleause our hold, and here
on a suddain, both my self and several others were strucken
totally blind with the filth and nastiness of the said place.
Yet soon after we recovered our sight again, without any
other help than the benefit of the fresh and open air,
which dissipated those malignant vapours that oppressed
our eyes. On June the 14th, we had a great and fierce
A great danger.

Tornado, with which our Cable broke, and had it not
then hapned to be high water at that instant, we had been

154

Page 154
lost inevitably. However, we had the good fortune to
shoar her up again, and by that means secure our selves from
farther danger. On June the 21. we weighed anchor again,
and went a league higher than the former place.
Here we watered, and in the mean while left men below to
cut wood.

Two Negroes
make their escape.

Thursday June the 23. this day ran away from us two
Negroes; the name of one of them was Hernando, who
was taken with Don Thomas de Argandona, upon the Coast
of Guayaquil, as was mentioned above. The other was
named Silvestre, being taken at the Town of Hilo. Following
the example of these afore-mentioned, on Munday
June the 27th, that is four days after, two more of our
prisoners endeavoured to make their escape, both of them
slaves. One of these was named Francisco, who was a Negro,
and had been taken in the Cacao-ship mentioned be-
Others endeavour
is but are
taken.
fore. The name of the other was also Francisco, and he
was an Indian born, who was taken before Panama. Their
attempts to escape succeeded not, for we caught them both
again, before they got on shoar. On Tuesday following I
went to sail up and down the Gulf, in the little Bark belonging
to our ship; and having viewed all places, took
this description of Golfo Dulce here inserted. Our Captain
gave this Gulf the name of King CHARLES his
Harbour.


155

Page 155
[ILLUSTRATION]

156

Page 156

CHAP. XX.

They depart from Golfo Dulce, to go and
cruise under the Æquinoctial. Here they take
a rich Spanish vessel with
37000 Pieces
of Eight, besides Plate and other Goods. They
take also a Pacquet-boat bound from
Panama to
Lima. An account of their Sailings and the
Coasts along.

They resolve to
go and cruise.
OUr vessel being now careened, and all things in a readiness
for our departure, on Tuesday June the 28th
in the afternoon, we weighed anchor to go to Sea again,
turning out towards the mouth of Golfo Dulce. Our design
was to cruise under the Æquinoctial, as had been concluded
upon before, thereby to get what purchase we could
by Sea, seeing the greatest part of our attempts upon land
had proved hitherto very unsuccessful unto us.

Wednesday June the 29th, both the night last past and
this day we had rainy weather. About three in the afternoon
a fresh gale sprang up at S. W. and S.S.W. our course
being S. E. and S. E. by S. At five this evening the Gulf
bore N. W. by W. being seven leagues distant; and Punta
Borrica
three leagues and an half distant.

The bark out-
sideth the ship.
Thursday June the 30th, all night past we enjoyed a fresh
gale at S.S.W. We sailed in the Barque (where I was) better
than the man of war; for so we called the Trinity vessel;
notwithstanding that she was newly cleansed and tallowed.
This day we had hasey weather, and I reckoned
my self from Punta Borrica S.S.E. eighteen leagues and an
half.

Tornados.
July the first 1681, last night we had two or three Tornados.
I reckoned this day a S.S.E. way, and by a clear observation,

157

Page 157
found Lat. 6 d. 10. North. We saw great quantities
of fish as we sailed this day.

July the second, we made a S. East way, and our reckoning
was 64 by it. By observation I found Lat. 5 d. 20.
North. At noon the same day we had a fresh gale at S.W.
with some rain.

July the third, we had hasey weather. We made a S. E.
by S. way, and 37.

Munday July the fourth, the night past was windy with
rain, which forced us to hand our top-sails. Our reckoning
this day was a S. E. way, and an hundred miles.

July the fifth we had a clear night the last past, and withal,
a fresh gale. By this we made a S.E. way. Our Latitude
this day gave us 2 d. 20. North. This morning we
saw Land Southward of us lying in low hammocks. It
was the Point, so called, of Manglares.

Wednesday July the 6th, we turned up along shoar, and
by observation took this day, Lat. 2 d. 02 N. Hereabouts
every new Moon is experimented a windward current. In
the evening of this day we were close in with low land.
We had windy weather and a great Sea.

Thursday July the seventh, this day by observation taken,
we found Lat. 01 d. 48. North. In the evening of
the said day we lost sight of the said ship.

The next day being July the eighth, we saw the ship again,
whose loss began to create some concern in our minds.
This day we made very high land all along as we went.
And the Port, or rather Bay, of San Mateo, or St. Matthews,
appeared unto us like several Islands.

Saturday July the ninth, this morning we stood fair in
with the Port of Tucames. Off of the highest part of
the land seemeth to lye a Key. At the North East point
of the Port it appeareth exactly thus.


158

Page 158
[ILLUSTRATION]

Puerto de Tucames.

This day at noon we had a clear observation, which gave
us Lat. 01 d 22 North.

Sunday July the tenth, last night past we stood off to
Sea, thereby to keep clear of the shoar. This days observation
shewed us Lat. 01 d. 31. North. About noon the

They espy a
Sail.
same day we hapned to espy a Sail, unto which immediately
we gave chace. We bore up one point of the Compass,
thereby to hinder her lasking away; but notwithstanding
in the evening lost sight of her again. However,
our great ship got up with her, and about eight of the clock
at night made her a Prize. She proved to be the same ship
named San Pedro, which we had taken the last year, being
then bound from Truxillo to Panama, and laden with Wine,
Gunpowder, and pieces of Eight, whereof mention was
made in its due place. Thus this same bottom became
doubly fortunate unto us, being twice taken by us in the
space of fourteen Months. For she had on board her now
twenty one thousand pieces of Eight, in eight Chests, and
in bags sixteen thousand more, besides Plate.

Munday and Tuesday the 11th and 12th of the said
Month we made in for the shoar. Our Prize was so deeply
laden, that she seemed clearly to be buryed in the water.
She had forty men on board her besides some Merchants
and Fryars. On Tuesday an observation gave us Lat. 1
d. 20 N.

Wednesday July the 13th, this day we dared not adventure
into the Bay of San Mateo, because we saw some In-


159

Page 159
dians who had made a great fire on shoar, which as we
judged, was designedly done to give intelligence of our arrival.
Hereupon we bore away for the River of San Tiago,
six leagues more or less, distant from the Bay aforementioned,
to the North East. Thursday, Friday, and Sa-
They rommage
the Prize.
turday of the said week, we spent in taking out what parcels
of Cacao-nut we thought fit from on board the Prize,
which was chiefly laden with the said Commodity. This
being done, we cut down the Main-mast by the board, and
And turn her
away.
gave them only their Main-sail, and thus turning the ship
loose, sent away in her all our old slaves, for the good service
they had done us, taking new ones from the Prize in
their room. One only we still detained, who was Francisco
the Negro, that attempted to run away by swimming
ashoar, as was mentioned above.

Sunday July the 17th, this day we went from the ship,

River of San
Tiago.
and found the River of San Tiago afore-mentioned. At
the mouth of this River we stayed Munday and Tuesday
following to take in water, which we now much wanted.
On the sides of the River we found good store of Plantans.
Our fresh water we fetched the distance of four miles up
the River. We saw several Indians, but could not speak
with them, they were so shy of us, being forewarned by
the Spaniards not to come near us.

On wednesday July the 20th, we shared our plunder a-

They make a
dividend.
mong our selves, or rather this day made part of the dividend
of what we had taken, the rest being reserved to another
day. Our prisoners being examined, informed us,
that the Spaniards had taken up our Anchors and Cables
which we left behind us at the Isle of Juan Fernandez. Also
that they had surprized the Mosquito Indian that we left
behind us there on shoar, by the light of a fire which he
made in the night upon the Isle.

Tuesday July the twenty first, all the four and twenty

They share the
rest of the
goods.
hours last past, we stood off and in. The next day we
shared the rest of our things taken in the Prize; as also the
Money that was in the bags; the rest we laid up to divide

160

Page 160
upon another occasion. Especially after such time as we
were got through the Straights of Magallanes. Our dividend
amounted to the sum of 234 Pieces of Eight unto
each man. Our prisoners informed us this day, that a new
Vice-roy of Peru was arrived at Panama, and that he dared
not adventure up to Lima in a ship of twenty five guns
that was at Panama, for fear of meeting with us at Sea, but
had chose rather to stay until the Armada came down from
Lima to safeguard and conduct him thither.

July the 23 we had a fresh breeze at S.W. And the next
day a clear observation, which gave us only Latitude 14.
m. North. This day Cape San Francisco at N. E. appeared
thus unto us.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cabo de San Francisco.

Munday July the 25th, this day we observed Latitude
01 d. 20 S. And we had a South West wind. July the
26th, this morning we had a very great dew fallen in the
night last past. The weather in like manner was very
close. On Wednesday July the 27th Cape Passao, at S.S.W.
and at six leagues distance appeared thus.


161

Page 161
[ILLUSTRATION]

Cabo Passao.

The same morning about seven of the clock we espied

They espy another
sail at sea
a sail E.S.E. from us, under the shoar. We presently gave
her close chace, as eagerly as we could, and about noon
came up with her. But several of the people belonging to
her were already got to shoar, whereby they made their escape
from being taken our prisoners. These were chiefly a
Fryar, who was either a passenger, or Chaplain to the vessel,
and five Negroes. She proved to be a Barco de Avi-
VVhich is taken.

so,
or Pacquet-boat that was going with Letters from Panama
to Lima. In this Barque we took among other Prisoners,
two white women who were passengers to the same
place. Both these and the rest of the prisoners told us,
they had heard at Panama, that we were all gone out of
these Seas homewards over land, and that made them adventure
now up towards Lima, otherwise they had not
come. This day and Thursday following, we spent in taking
out of the Pacquet-boat what we could find in her;
which all were things of no considerable value, they having
scarce brought any thing with them but the Pacquet. They
told us moreover, that the new Vice-roy of Peru, of whom
we made mention above, was setting forth from Panama
under the conduct of three sail of ships; the one of sixteen,
the other of eight, and the third of six Guns. That
a general peace was all over Europe, excepting only that the
English had wars with the Argerines by Sea, and the Spaniards
by land. Having got what we could out of the prisoners
and the vessel, we gave them their liberty, and sent

162

Page 162
them away in the same Barque, as being desirous not to encumber
ourselves with more then we could well manage.
That night we stood out to Sea all night long, most of
our men being fudled.

CHAP. XXI.

They take another Spanish ship richly laden under
the Æquinoctial. They make several Dividends
of their booty among themselves. They arrive
at the Isle of
Plate, where they are in danger of
being all Massacred by their Slaves and Prisoners.
Their departure from thence for the Port
and Bay of
Paita, with design to plunder the said
place.

They met with
another Prize.
THe next morning after we had turned away the
Pacquet-Boat afore-mentioned, the weather being
very close, we espied another sail creeping close under our
Lee. This vessel looked mighty big; so that we thought
she had been one of their chiefest men of war, who was
sent to surprize or destroy us. Notwithstanding, our
brave Commander Captain Sharp resolved to fight her, and
either to take the said vessel, though never so big, or that
she should take us. Unto this effect, coming nearer unto
her, we easily perceived she was a Merchant ship of great
bulk, as most of your Spanish Vessels are, and withal, very
deeply laden. Being up with them, those within her fired
three or four Guns at us first, thinking to make their
party good against us. But we answered them briskly,
with a continual volley of small Arms, so that they soon
And take her.
ran down into the Hold, and surrendered, crying aloud for
quarter. As it should seem we had killed in that Volley

163

Page 163
their Captain, and one Seaman, and also wounded their
Boat-swain; which loss of their Commander daunted them
so suddenly, he being a man of good repute in those Seas.
Captain Sharp, with twelve more of our Company, entered
her the first. In this Vessel I saw the beautifullest woman
that I ever did see in all the South Sea. The name of the
Captain of this Vessel was Don Diego Lopez, and the ship
was called el Santo Rosario, or the Holy Rosary. The men
we found on board her, were about the number of forty,
more or less.

Having examined our prisoners, they informed us, that
the day before they set sail from el Callao (from which Port

They hear of
their surgeons.
they were going towards Panama) our men whom they had
taken prisoners at Arica, were brought in to that place.
And that they had been very civilly entertained there by all
sorts of people, but more especially by the women. That
one of our Surgeons, whom we suspected to be Mr. Bullock,
was left behind and remained still at Arica.

We lay at anchor from Friday, July the 29th, which was

They rummage
the prize.
the day we took this prize, until Wednesday following, at
the same place under Cape Passao that we anchored before.
Here we sunk the Bark that we had taken at the Gulf of
They sink their
Bark.
Nicoya, being willing to make use of what rigging she had,
and also to contract our number of men. In the mean
while we took out of the prize much plate, and some money
ready coyned, besides six hundred and twenty jarrs of
wine and brandy, and other things. Thus, leaving onely
the fore-mast standing in the said vessel, we turned her away,
as we had done the others before, together with all
the prisoners in her, giving them their liberty not to be
encumbred with them; and withal, being desirous to
spare our provisions as much as we could. We detained
onely one man, named Francisco, who was a Biscainer, by
reason he reported himself to be the best Pilot of those
Seas. This being done, we shared all the Plate and Linnen
taken in our prize, and weighed from thence, standing S. S.
E. with a fresh wind that sprang up.


164

Page 164

Another dividend
made.
Friday, August the 4th. This day we shared the ready
money taken in the Rosario, our last prize. Our dividend
came unto ninety four pieces of eight each man. Cape
Passao, under which all these prizes were taken, at N. E.
appeareth thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Cabo Passao.

The land runneth S. E. and is for five leagues together
to windward of this Cape, all mountainous and high
land.

They compleat
their dividends.

The next day, being August the 5th, we compleated our
dividends, sharing this day all our odd money ready coined
and plate, with some other things.

Letters perused
Saturday, August the 6th. This day perusing some letters
taken in the last prize, I understood by them that the
Spaniards had taken prisoner one of the last party of our
men that left us. Also, that they were forced to fight all
their way over land as they went, both against the Spaniards
and the Indians; these having made peace with the
Spaniards since our departure, as was mentioned above.
That our English-men had killed, amongst other Spaniards,
the brother of Captain Assientos, and Captain Alonso, an
Officer so named. Moreover, that ten sail of Privateers
were coming out of the North Sea, with intent to march
over-land into the South Sea, as we had done before, but
that they were prevented, being forced back by the great
rains that fell near the Islands called Zamblas.

On August the 7th we had very fair weather, and not-

A strong Current.

withstanding sometimes strong winds from shoar, and also
a strong Current to leeward. This ran so fierce against

165

Page 165
us the next day, August the 8th, that in the space of the
last four and twenty hours we lost three leagues.

Tuesday August the ninth, we saw the Port and Town

Manta.
of Manta; this being nothing else than sixteen or seventeen
stragling houses, with a large and high brick Church
belonging unto it. What we got in the day by the help of
the wind, we lost in the night by the current. The same
fortune we had the next day, for we still gained no way
all this while.

Thursday August the eleventh, all the night last past we
had but little wind; this day we had a violent current to
windward, as before, with some gusts of wind. However,
by the help of these we made shift to get to windward
of the Isle of Plate.

August the 12th, in the morning, we came to an anchor

Isle of Plate.
at the aforesaid Isle. We sent our boat ashoar with men, as
we had done formerly to kill Goats, but we experimented
them to be extreamly shy and fugitive over what they
were the last year. Here it was that our Quarter-master
The Author
fighteth a Duel
James Chappel and my self fought a Duel together on shoar.
In the evening of this day our slaves agreed among themselves,
and plotted to cut us all in pieces, not giving quarter
to any, when we should be buryed in sleep. They
A plot of their
slaves.
conceived this night afforded them the fittest opportunity,
by reason we were all in drink. But they were discovered
unto our Commander by one of their own Companions.
And one of them named San Tiago, whom we
brought from Tqueque, leapt over-board; who notwithstanding
was shot in the water by our Captain, and thus
punished for his Treason. The rest laid the fault on that
slave, and so it passed, we being not willing to enquire any
farther into the matter, having terrifyed them with the
death of their companion. We lay at this Isle until Tuesday
following, and in the mean while gave our vessel a pair
of boots and tops, being very merry all the while with the
wine and brandy we had taken in the Prize.


166

Page 166

On Tuesday August the 16th, in the afternoon, we weighed
from thence with a S. W. wind. The Island at N. W.
from us, gave us this following appearance.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Isla de la Plata.

Wednesday August the 17th, the Island at East, this
morning and at two leagues and an half distance, appeared
thus.

[ILLUSTRATION]

Island of PLATE.

All the day long until the evening we had a Leeward
current, but then I could not perceive any.

Solango.
Thursday August the 18th, this morning we were to
windward of the Island of Solango. In the night before
we had continual misty rain. At noon the aforesaid Island
bore N. by E. of us, and at three Leagues distance appeared
thus.


167

Page 167
[ILLUSTRATION]

Isla de Solango.

About three Leagues from Solango are two Rocks, called
Los ahorcados. They appear both high and black unto
the view. Besides this N. N. E. from Point St. Helena
is a high Rock, which to windward thereof runneth shoaling
for the space of half a mile under water. It is distant
about eight leagues, more or less, from the said Point, and
is called Chanduy. At this place, and upon this Rock, was
lost the ship afore-mentioned, that was ordered from these
Seas, to the aid of our most gracious Soveraign King Charles
the First, late King of England. Said ship had on board, as
the Spaniards relate, to the sum of many millions of pieces
of Eight; all which quantity of Plate was sent as a present
unto our King, being then in his troubles, by the worthy
Merchants of Lima. The Rock afore-mentioned lyeth about
two Leagues distant from the Main.

August the 29th, this day our Pilot told us, that since we

A great rich
vessel cast away.

were to windward, a certain ship that was coming from
Lima, bound for Guayaquil, ran ashoar on Santa Clara, loosing
there in money, to the value of one hundred thousand
pieces of Eight; which otherwise, peradventure, we
might very fortunately have met withal. Moreover, that
the Viceroy of Peru had Beheaded their great Admiral
Ponce, for not coming to fight and destroy us, mean while
we were at Gorgona. This evening we saw the Point of
Santa Helena, at the distance of ten leagues to S.S.E. from
us.

August the 20th, this day we had both misty and cold

Point St. Helen
weather. In the afternoon we saw la Punta de Santa He-

168

Page 168
lena, at N. E. by N. and at seven leagues distance more
or less.

On Sunday, August the 21st, we had a fair and clear
day. I reckoned my self this day to be about twenty five
leagues to the Southward of Santa Helena.

August the 22d. This morning about two of the clock
we came close in with the shoar. We found our selves to

Punta de Mero.

be Leeward of a certain Point called Punta de Mero, which
is nothing else than a barren and rocky Point. Here
runneth an eddy current under the shoar.

Tuesday, August the 23d. This day in the morning we
had but little wind. At noon it blew fresh again. We
made all day but short trips, and riffed top-sails.

Wednesday, August the 24th. This morning a great
dew fell. At noon we were West from Cape Blanco. We
found by observation Lat. 4 D. 13 S. We resolved now to

They resolve for
Paita.
bear up for Paita, and take it by surprizal if possible, thereby
to provide our selves with many necessaries that we
wanted.

CHAP. XXII.

They arrive at Paita, where they are disappointed
of their expectations, as not daring
to land, seeing all the Country alarmed before
them. They bear away for the Straight of

Magallanes. Description of the Bay and
Port of
Paita, and Colan. An account of their
Sailings towards the Streight aforementioned.

THursday, August the 25th. The night before this

They descry the
land of
Paita.
day, we stood off to Sea for fear of the shoar, and
lest we should be descryed from the Coast of Paita, unto
which we were now pretty nigh. About noon this day

169

Page 169
we began to stand in again, and saw the homing of land,
though with hasey weather. The next day, being August the
26th, we had cold winds, great dews, and dry weather.

Saturday, August the 27th. All this day, but more e-

La Silla de
Paita.
specially in the morning, we had many fogs. In the afternoon
we saw la Silla de Paita at W. S. W. being about five
leagues distant from it.

Sunday August the 28th, last night about ten of the
clock we were close in with land, at the distance of half
a league, more or less to leeward of the Island of Lobos.

Isle of Lobos.
We continued our course all that night, and about break of
day found our selves to be close under Pena Horadada, a
Pena Horadada.

high and steep rock so called. From hence we sailed with
a land-wind, and sent away from the ship two Canoas well
They endeavour
to land.
Manned and Armed, with good hopes that we had conceived
in our mind, to have taken the Town of Paita undiscryed.
But as it should seem, they had already received
news of our coming, or being upon that Coast, and also
supplies of Forces that were sent them from the City of
Piura, distant from thence twelve leagues up within the
Country. These supplys consisted chiefly of three Companies
of Horse and Foot, all of them being armed with
fire-arms. Besides this, they had made for the defence of
the Town, a breast-work along the sea-side, and the great
Church which lyeth at the outermost part of the Town.
From these places, as also from a hill that covereth the
Town, they fired at our men, who were innocently rowing
towards shoar with their Canoas. This preposterous firing
was the preservation of our people. For had the
Spaniards permitted our men to come ashoar, they had assuredly
destroyed them every man. But fear always hindreth
that Nation of Victory, at least in most of our attempts.

Our men perceiving themselves to be discovered, and

They dare not
to land.
the enemy prepared for their reception, hereupon retreated,
and came on board the ship again without attempting to

170

Page 170
land, or do any thing else in relation to the taking of the
place. We judged there could not be less then one hundred
and fifty fire-arms, and four times as many Lances
upon the shoar, all in a readiness to hinder our people from
landing. Within the Town our Pilot told us, there might
be to the number of one hundred and fifty Families, more
or less.

A description
of
Colan.
Being disappointed of our expectations at Paita, we stood
down the Bay towards Colan. This is another Town so
called, and which exceedeth three times the bigness of Paita.
It is chiefly inhabited by Fishermen, and from hence
they send fish unto most inland Towns of Peru; and also
serve Paita with water from the River Colan, not far distant
from the Town. It is the space of two leagues more
or less from the Town of Paita afore-mentioned to Colan,
and from thence unto the River, one league, although the
Houses of Colan do reach almost unto the River. The
Town it self of Colan is only inhabited by Indians, and
these are all rich; for as much as that they will be paid in
ready money for every thing they do for the Spaniards.
But the Town of Paita is chiefly inhabited by Spaniards,
though there be also some Indians; but the Spaniards do
not suffer the Indians to be any great gainers, or grow rich
under them.

They stand away
for the
Straight of

Magallanes.
About ten of the clock a young breeze sprang up, and
with that, we stood away West, and W. by S. Within a
little while it blew so fresh, that we were forced to riff our
top-sails. the weather being very dark and hasey. I took
the Port of Paita, and Bay of Colan, as they lay exactly
situated, thus.


171

Page 171
[ILLUSTRATION]

172

Page 172

Munday, August the 29th. All our hopes of doing any
farther good upon the Coasts of the South Sea, being now
frustrated, seeing we were descryed before our arrival
where-ever we came, we resolved unanimously to quit all
other attempts, and bear away for the Straight of Magallanes,
in order to our return homewards either for England,
or some of our Plantations in the West Indies. This
day we had a great dew, and I reckoned my self W. S. W.
from Paita thirteen leagues and an half, with very little
wind. So we stood East.

The next day, August the 30th, we had misty weather.
We made a W. S. W. way, and by it five leagues and one
third. In the afternoon of this day, the wind freshned again,
having been but little before, and we stood E. S. E.

The last day of August we had very fair weather. I
believed now that the wind was setled at S. E. and S. S. E.
We made a S. S. W. way, and twenty one leagues and two
thirds.

September the First. The night past was very cloudy,
but withal we had a fresh gale. Our reckoning was a
S. W by S. way, and that we had made sixteen leagues and
two thirds.

September the 2d we reckoned a S. W. way, and by it
twenty six leagues and two thirds. This day we had an
observation, and found Lat. 7 D. 40 S.

September the 3d brought us both cloudy and misty
weather. We made a W.S.W. way, and fourteen leagues.

September the 4th. This day the wind was at E. S. E.
and sometimes E. coming in many flaws. We had a S. W.
by S. way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and two
thirds. We had a great Sea from the South.

Munday, September the 5th, we had great winds, and a
high and short Sea. Our way was S. S. W. and half W.
by which we reckoned twenty eight leagues and two
thirds of a league.

September the 6th we had a very fresh wind at S. E.
by E. with an indifferent smooth Sea. By observation we


173

Page 173
found this day Latitude 12 d. 00 South. We made a S.W.
by S. way, and twenty eight leagues and one third.

Wednesday September the seventh, we had a very fresh
wind. We reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and thirty six
leagues. We observed Latitude 13 d. 24 South. We make
now each mess a plumb Pudding of Salt-water and wineLees.

On the eighth we enjoyed a fresh gale of wind, though
with hasey weather. Our reckoning was a S.W. by S. way,
and hereby twenty five leagues, and one third of a league.

September the 9th, we made a S.W. by S. way, and twenty
one leagues and a third. In the afternoon the wind
came about something more Southerly, allowing us a S. W.
course.

Saturday September the 10th, all the night past and this
morning the wind was very fresh at East. Our way was
S.S.W. and by our reckoning thirty five leagues and one
third. The weather now was warm. An observation this
day gave us Lat. 16 d. 40. South.

September 11 we had whiffling winds. A South-west
half South way, and thereby twelve leagues and two thirds.
By an observation made we found 17 d. 10 South. Now
we had a very great Sea, so that we took in our sprit-sail.

September the 12th, all the night before this day, we
were under a pair of courses. Yet this morning we heaved
out main top-sail. We made a W. S. W. way, and seventeen
leagues and one third. By observation we found
Lat. 17 d. 30 South.

The 13th, in the night past we had huge and great
storms of wind. In the morning our Goose-head gave
way, so that about noon we were forced to lye by till four
in the afternoon to mend it. Our course was S. W. half
W. and our reckoning twenty nine leagues, and two thirds
of a league. Latitude by observation 18 d. 12 South.

Wednesday September the 14th, this day we had very
hasey weather. We made a S.S.W. way, and twenty leagues.

September the 15th, this day likewise we had a S.S.W.


174

Page 174
way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and one half. Our
observation taken this day gave us 20 d. 09. South.

On September the 16th, we had a clear day, a S. W. half
South way, and made sixteen leagues and two thirds, We
found by observation, Lat. 20 d. 48 South.

The 17th, last night was very calm. Also this day, it
being a full Moon. We reckoned a S. W. way, and only by
reason of the calmness of the weather nine leagues and one
third of a league. We had an observation which afforded
us 21 d 08 S. Latitude.

Sunday September the 18th, in the night last past a wind
sprang up at S.S.E. which the morning of this day freshned
at S. E. We made a W. S. W. way, and by it eighteen
leagues. Moreover, this day we had a clear observation
that shewed us Lat. 21 d. 30 S.

September the 19th, all the night past we had a very
fresh wind. But this morning it came about to E. by S.
and E.S.E. with hasey weather. I reckoned a S. W. by S.
way, and twenty two leagues.

September the 20th, this day gave us a fresh wind, hasey
weather, a S. by W. way, and hereupon twenty three leagues
and one third.

September the 21, this day also the fresh gale continued,
with cloudy, and sometimes misty weather. Our reckoning
shewed us a S. by W. way, as the day before, and by
it twenty eight leagues and one third. By an observation
made, we found Lat. 25 d. 15 South.

Thursday September the 22, this day we had a very fresh
wind. We reckoned a South half West way, and by that
twenty nine leagues and two thirds. An observation taken
gave us Lat. 26 d. 42 South. We observed this day a

A North East
Sea.
North East Sea, which seemed very strange unto us.

The next day we had several showers of small rain. My
reckoning was a S. by W. way; and thereupon twenty six
leagues. We found by observation Lat. 27. d. 57 South.

September the 24th, we had hasey weather, and the wind
not to fresh at E. S. E. with a smooth Sea. We made a


175

Page 175
S. S. W. way half westerly, and twenty three leagues and
two thirds. This day also an observation gave us Lat. 28
d. 57 South. I reckoned now that we were distant from
Paita 302 leagues and two thirds.

Sunday September the 25th, this day we had not much
wind, and withal, hasey weather. At noon the wind came
East, then E.N.E. and then again N.E. by E. We reckoned
a S. by E. way, half Easterly and 55.

Munday the 26th, we had hasey weather and a fresh
wind at N. East. We reckon a S.E. half South way, and
twenty four leagues. In the afternoon we experimented a
N.N.E. Sea, and then soon after a N.N.E. wind. After this
a North wind, and that but very little.

September the 27th, all the night before this day we had
a fresh wind at N.N.E. About eight this morning it came
about again to N. N. W. We made a S.E. by S. way, and
thirty eight leagues. By observation I found Lat. 32 d. 30
South. Now we enjoyed a very smooth sea, and fair weather.

Wednesday September the 28th, in the night past a very
fresh wind at N.N.W. and N.W. At break of day we had
a wind at . . . . heaving us a back at once. At noon again
the wind was at S.W. our course being S. E. This morning
we took down our top gallant-masts. We made a S.E. by E.
way, and on this road twenty seven leagues and two thirds.
We found by an observation made, Lat. 33 d. 16 South, a
South west sea.

On the 29th we had very windy and hasey weather, with
some rain now and then. All last night we handed our
main top-sail. We made a S.E. by E. way, and thirty two
leagues and two thirds. We had a South west sea and
wind.

Friday September the 30th, this day we had fresh winds
between S. W. and W. We reckoned a S. E. half South
way, and thereupon forty four leagues. By observation
we found Lat. 35 d. 54 South.


176

Page 176

October the first, the wind this day was not very fresh,
but varying. My reckoning was a S. E. half South way,
and twenty four leagues. An observation gave us 36 d. 50

Another Quadrant
made by
the Author.
South. This day I finished another Quadrant, being the
third I finished in this Voyage. We had a South west sea,
with showers of rain and gusts of wind.

Sunday October the second, the wind this day was hanging
between W.N.W.` and N.W. by N. We made a S.E by
S. way, and thirty three leagues and two thirds. By observation
we found 38 d. 14 South. About noon we had
a fresh wind at N.W. and S.W.

October the third, the last night in the forepart thereof
was clear, but the latter was rainy. The wind very fresh
at N.W. by N. But this day we had little wind, and cloudy
weather. A S. W. by W. wind, and a S.E. by S. way,
by which we reckoned thirty three leagues and one third
of a league.

October the fourth, we had a clear night and a very fresh
wind. We reckoned a S. E. by S. way, and thereby forty
three leagues. An observation taken shewed us, that we
were in Lat. 41 d. 34 South. This day also fell several
showers of rain.

October the fifth, we had a windy night the last past, and
a clear day. We reckoned a S.S.E. half E. way, and forty
four leagues and two thirds. By an observation made, we
found Lat. 43 d. 26 South. The weather now was very
windy, causing a huge tempestuous sea. The wind at N.W.
and N.W. by N. blowing very high.

October the sixth, this day the wind was still at N.W.
and yet not so fresh as it was yesterday, the weather very
foggy and misty. As for the wind it came in gusts, so
that we were forced to hand our top-sails, and sprit-sail.
We reckoned a S. E. half S. way, and thereby forty three
leagues and one third of a league. The Seas now were not
so high, as for some days past. In the evening we scudded
away under our fore course.

Friday, October the 7th. Last night was very cloudy,


177

Page 177
and this day both dark and foggy weather with small rain.
We made a S. E. way, and thirty leagues and two thirds.
A fresh wind at N. N. W and N. W. We keep still under
a fore course, not so much for the freshness of the wind, as
the closeness of the weather.

October the 8th, we had a clear night the night before

A great storm.
this day, and withal a strong gale; insomuch that this day
we were forced to take in our fore-sail, and loosen our Mizen,
which was soon blown to pieces. Our eldest Seamen
said that they were never in the like storm of wind
before. The Sea was all in a foam. In the evening it dulled
a little. We made a S. E. half E. way, and eighteen
leagues, with very dark weather.

Sunday, October the 9th. All the night past we had a

They drive at
a great rate.
furious W. N. W. wind. We set our sail a drough, and so
drove to the Southward very much, and almost incredibly,
if an observation had not hapned, which gave us Lat. 48
15 S. We had a very stiff gale at W. N. W. with a great
Sea from W. which met with a S. S. W. Sea as great as it.
Now the weather was very cold, and we had one or two
frosty mornings. Yesterday in the afternoon we had a very
great storm of hail. At noon we bent another Mizen.

Monday, Octob. the 10th. This day brought us a freshwind
at N. W. and N. N. W, We made a S. E. half E. way,
and by it forty four leagues. By observation we found
Lat. 49 D. 41 S. I reckoned my self now to be East from
Paita sixty nine leagues and an half.

Tuesday, October the 11th. Last night we had a small
time calm. This day was both cloudy and rainy weather.
The wind at S. W. and S. S. W. so furious, that at ten of the
clock this morning we scudded under a main sail. At noon
we lower'd our fore-yard while we sailed. We made a S.
E. by E. way, and thirty leagues.


178

Page 178

CHAP. XXIII.

The Bucaniers arrive at a place incognito, unto
which they give the name of
the Duke of Yorks
Islands. A description of the said Islands, and
of the Gulf, or
Lagoon, wherein they lie, so far
as it was searched. They remain there many
days by stress of weather, not without great dangers
of being lost. An account of some other
things remarkable that hapned there.

WEdnesday, October the 12th. All the night before
this day we had many high winds. I reckoned an
E. S. E. way, and twenty leagues; for our vessel drove at
a great rate. Moreover, that we were in Lat. 50 D. 50 S.
So that our Easting from Paita by my account ought to
be one hundred and one leagues, or thereabouts.

This morning about two hours before day, we hapned

They see land
before day, and
are miraculously
preserved
by great accident to espie land. It was the great mercy
of God, which had always attended us in this Voyage, that
saved us from perishing at this time; for we were close ashoar
before we saw it; and our fore-yard, which we most
needed in this occasion, was taken down. The land we
had seen was very high and towering; and here appeared
to be many Islands scattered up and down. We steered in
with what caution we could, between them and the Main,
and at last, God be praised, arrived at a place or rather Bay,
where we perceived our selves to be land-lockt, and as we
thought pretty safe from the danger of those tempestuous
Seas. From hence we sent away our Canoa to sound and
search the fittest place for anchoring. At this time one
One of their
men drowned.
of our men, named Henry Shergall, as he was going into
our sprit-sail top, hapned to fall into the water, and was

179

Page 179
drowned before any help could be had unto him, though
we endeavoured it as much as we possibly could. This accident
several of our company did interpret as a bad Omen
of the place; which proved not so, through the providence
of the Almighty, though many dangers were not wanting
here unto us, as I shall relate.

We came to an anchor in the depth of forty fathom Wa-

They came to
an anchor.
ter, more or less, and yet at no greater distance than a
stones cast from shoar. The water where we anchored was
very smooth, and the high lands round about all covered
with snow. Having considered the time of the year, and
all other circumstances, we resolved, that in case we could
find a sufficient stock of provisions here, we would stay the
They resolve to
stay here.
longer, that is, until Summer came, or something more,
before we prosecuted our intended Voyage homewards
through the Straights of Magallanes; which now we began
to be careful how to find. That day of our anchoring
in this Bay, we shot six or eight brave Geese, and
They kill Geese
and Fowls.
some smaller fowl besides. Here we found also many hundreds
of Mussel-banks; all which were very plentifully
stockt with that kind of fish. We buryed our dead man
on the shoar, giving him several Volleys for his FuneralRites,
according to the custom. In the night of this day our
anchor came home, so that we were forced to let go a
grapling to secure our selves. But still every flaw of wind
They are in
danger.
drove us. Hereupon we set our sprit-sail, and ran about a
mile into another Bay, where we let go another anchor,
and thus anchored again. The first anchor, which was also
the biggest in our ship, we lost by this accident, the cable
being cut by the rocks. Unto these Islands afore-mentioned
our Captain gave the name of His Royal Highness the
Duke of
Yorks Islands.

Thursday, October the 13th. This day we began to moor

They moor
their vessel.
our ship, she driving as we easily could perceive with every
flaw of wind that blew. The tide floweth here full
seven foot up and down. We moored our Vessell into a
rockey point, being a key whereof there be many in the

180

Page 180
circumference of this Bay. The ground of the bottom of
the said Bay we found was hard and sandy, being here and
there rockey. This evening we brought on board great
store of Lamperts, of which we made a kettle of broath,
that contained more than all our company could eat.

On Friday October the 14th, we killed several Geese.
As also many of another sort of Fowl like unto an Eagle,

A strange seafowl.

but having a bigger beak, with their nostrils rising from
the top of the middle of their beak by a hand trunk.
This Fowl liveth on Fish, but we saw none. Yesterday
in the evening there fell a great fleet of snow on the hills,
round about the Bay, but none where we were at anchor.
Multitudes of
Lamperts and
Mussels.
Moreover, this day in the evening we caught Lamperts in
great quantity, being three times as many as we could eat.
Our men in ranging the Keys for Game, found grass plaited
above a fathom long, and a knot tyed at the end thereof.
In like manner on other Keys they found Mussels and
Lampert shells. From these things we presently conclu-
They find tokens
of the
Inhabitants.
ded, that these Countries were inhabited, and that some Indians
or others were to be found hereabouts.

Saturday October the 15th, in the night last past we had

Another storm.
much rain, with large hail-stones. About midnight the
wind came to North with such great fury, that the Tree unto
which our Cable was fastned on shoar, gave way, and
came up by the Roots. All those gusts of wind were mixt
with violent storms of rain and hail. Thus we fastned again
unto other trees. But here it hapned, that our ship
coming up to the shoar, our Rudder toucht, and thereupon
broke our Goose-neck. Great was now our extremity,
They are in
great danger.
and greater it will be, if God send not better weather.
Scarce a minute now passed without flaws of wind and
rain.

Sunday October the 16th, all the night past was rainy, as

Much rain.
before. About nine of the clock our biggest harser gave
way and brake. All this day likewise we had rain with several
showers of hail, and but little wind to westward of
the North.


181

Page 181

Munday October the 17th, all last night until five this
morning, it ceased not to rain. Then until ten it snowed.
On the hills it snowed all the night long. This day we

Tracts of people.

hanted on the shoar many tracts of people hereabouts,
but could find none hitherto, they having fled and concealed
themselves for fear of us, as we supposed.

October the 18th. In the night past we had much rain
and hail. But the day was very clear. Hereupon we
made an observation, which gave us Lat. 50 D. 40 S.
Moreover, this day we had pretty warm weather.

October the 19th. Both a clear and frosty night the last
past. This day was hasey, and something windy from
the North quarter. Every day we had plenty of Lamperts,
and Mussels of a very large size.

October the 20th. The night past was rainy, and this

Another storm.
day windy, with very great gusts of wind at N. N. W. until
the afternoon. Then we had wind at N. W. being very
fresh and in gusts.

October the 21st. All the night past was tempestuous,

Which continueth.

with huge gusts of wind and showers of hail. Yesterday
in the evening we carried a cable ashoar, and fastned it
unto a tree. This being done, at midnight our biggest
cable broke in the middle. Towards morning we had
New dangers.
much snow. In the day, great gusts of wind with large
hail stones, and also great plenty of Lamperts.

October the 22d. Last night we had strange gusts of
wind from N. W. together with much hail and rain. This
day we killed a Penguin; and also began to carry water on

Penguin.
board.

October the 23d. All the twenty four hours last past

Much rain still
we had much rain. The wind was but little at W. and
W. S. W.

October the 24th. All this time until noon nothing but
rain. At that time it held up fair for the space of half an
hour, or thereabouts, and then it rained again all the rest of
the day.


182

Page 182

October the 25th. All this while we had not one minute
fair. Towards evening it held up from raining, but
the weather was cloudy, and withal much warmer than

Warm weather.
when we came hither at first.

Wednesday, October the 26th. All the night past, and
this forenoon, we had fair weather. But after noon it

Cockles.
rained again. We found Cockles like unto those we have
in England.

A new storm.
Thursday, October the 27th. In the night past we had
much rain, with very great gusts of wind, lasting for the
whole space thereof. Yet notwithstanding, this day proved
to be the fairest that we ever had since we came into
this place. In the evening of this day, our Canoa which
was gone to search the adjacent places for Indians, or what
else they could find, returned unto the ship, with a Doree at
her stern. They had gone, as it should seem, beyond the
old Bay where we first anchored, and thereabouts hapned
They take a
Doree and one
prisoner.
His habit.
to meet with this Doree. In it were three Indians, who
perceiving themselves nigh being taken, leapt over-board
to make their escape. Our men in pursuing them did
unadvisedly shoot one of them dead. A second, being a
woman, escaped their hands. But the third, who was a
lusty boy about eighteen years of age, was taken, and him
they brought on board the ship. He was covered onely
with a Seals skin, having no other cloathing about him:
His eyes were squinted, and his hair was cut pretty short.
In the middle of the Doree they had a fire burning either
for dressing of victuals, or some other use. The Doree it
self was built sharp at both ends, and flat bottom'd. They
had a net to catch Penguins, and a club like unto our bandies,
called by them a Tomahunks. His Language we could not
understand, but withal he pointed up the Lagoon, giving
us to understand, that there were more people thereabouts.
This was confirmed by our men, who also said they had
seen more. They had Darts to throw against an Eenemy
pointed with wood.


183

Page 183

On the next day, being October the 28th, in the evening

They search for
more people, but
find none.
our Canoa went from the ship again to seek for more Indians.
They went into several Lagoons, and searched them
narrowly. But they could find nothing else than two or
three Huts; all the Natives being fled before our arrival.
In the evening they returned unto the ship, bringing with
them very large Lamperts, and also Mussels which were
Huge Mussels.
six inches and an half long. Our Indian prisoner could
open Mussels these with his fingers, which our men could
not so hreadily do with their knives. Both the night past
and this day we ad very fair weather.

On the 29th we had in like manner a very fair day, and
also a smooth wind at S. S. E. Our Indian this day pointed
unto us, that there were men in this Country, or not
far off from hence, with great beards. He appeared unto
us by his actions to be very innocent and foolish. But by
his carriage I was also perswaded that he was a Man-eater.
This day likewise we caught Lamperts enough to suffice
us for the morrow.

Sunday, October the 30th. This day was fair, and there
blew a small S. S. E. wind. In the morning we sent a

They can find
neither provisions
nor
Indians.

Canoa over to the Eastward-shore, to seek either for provisions
or Indians. I my self could not go, as I desired, being
with two or three more, at that time very much
tormented with the Gripes. I am perswaded that this place
where we now were, is not so great an Island as some Hydrographers
do lay it down, but rather an Archipelago of
smaller Islands. We saw this day many Penguins, but they
Penguins.
were so shie, that we could not come near them. They
pad on the water with their wings very fast, but their bodies
are too heavy to be carried by the said wings. The
Sun now made the weather very warm, insomuch that the
warm weather
snow melted apace.

October the 31st. Both last night and this day were
very fair. At noon our Canoa returned from the
Eastern shoar, bringing word they had found several good
Bays and Harbours, that were deep even close unto the


184

Page 184
shoar. Onely that there lay in them several suncken
Rocks, the which we had also where we were. But these
Rocks are not dangerous to shipping, by reason they have
weeds which lye two fathoms in circumference about them.
This morning blew a small wind at N.N.E.

November the first, this day was also fair, and we had a
small wind as before, at N.N.E.

November the second, last night I took the Polar distance
of the South star of the Cocks foot, and found it to be
28 d. 25. I observed also the two Magallan Clouds, of
which I made mention in this Journal before, and found
them to be as followeth, viz. the lesser 14 d. 05. and the
greater 14 d. 25. The morning of this day we hoysted
an end our top-masts, and also brought too a Main-topsail,
and Fore-sail, and finished our filling all the water we
needed. At the same time the wind hung Easterly, and I
was still much tormented with the Gripes as before.

November the third, this morning we hanged our Rud-

They make ready
to depart.
der, the greatest piece of work we had to do, after those
violent storms above-mentioned. In the afternoon we
halled in our two biggest Harsers; and also our biggest
Cable from the shoar. For the three days last past we had
a very great and dark fog between us and the Eastward
shoar. We had now very little wind in the Cove where
we were, but abroad at sea there blew at the same time a
stiff gale at S.S.E. Moreover, we could perceive now, the
stormy weather being blown over, much small fry of fish
about the ship, whereof we could see none, as was mentioned
before. This day we had a very clear and calme evening.

November the fourth, both all last night and this day we

Calme weather
again.
had very calme weather. And this morning a small
breeze sprang up at N. and N.N.E. which afterwards wheeled
about unto S. and S.S.E. This morning we hoisted
our Main and Fore-yards; and likewise fetcht off from
the shoar our other harser and Cable, into the depth of eleven
fathom water. Our resolutions were now changed

185

Page 185
for a departure, in order to seek the mouth of the Straights
of Magallanes, seeing that we could not winter here, for
want of Provisions, which we could not find either on the
Continent, or about these Islands afore-mentioned. The
weather now was very warm, or rather hot, and the Birds
did sing as sweetly as those in England. We saw here both
Thrushes and Black birds, and many other sorts of those
that are usually seen in our own Country.

Saturday November the fifth, this morning brought us a

They sail away.
wind at N.N.E. hereupon, we warped unto a rocky point,
thereby to get out of the Cove where we lay. For our anchor
came home unto us as we were carrying our Warp
out. At this time a second breeze came up very fresh in
our stern; so that we took the opportunity thereof, and
went away before it. By noon this day we hoisted in our
Canoas, and also turned away loose unto the sea our Indian
Doree.
As for the Indian boy whom we had taken in said
Doree, we kept him still prisoner, and called him Orson. Our
Cove at our departure from this place, looked thus, as I
took then the description thereof. When we were come
out into the Channel, the weather grew stark calme. Only
now and then we had a small breeze, sometimes from
one quarter, and then from another. By this slackness of
wind we observed, that the Current hoisted us to the Southward.
On the East-side of this Lagoon, we perceived the
Indians to make a great smoak at our departure.


186

Page 186
[ILLUSTRATION]

187

Page 187

We had a very fair day till six in the evening, when we
got without the mouth of the Gulf, it blew so hard, that
in an hour it forced us to hand our top-sails. Having now
a fit gale at N. W. and N.N W. we stood S. W. by W. to
clear our selves of some breaks which lye four Leagues
from the Gulfs mouth at S. and S. S. E. Hereabouts we
saw many riffs and rocks, which occasioned us to stand
close halled. I have drawn here and given unto my Reader,
so much as I have seen of the Gulf it self; the rest
must be compleated in due time by them, that have greater
opportunities of making a farther search into it, then I
had at the time of our stay here under such tempestuous
weather, as I have described, and the distemper which
hung upon me at the same time.


188

Page 188
[ILLUSTRATION]

189

Page 189

CHAP. XXIV.

They depart from the English Gulf in quest of the
Straight of
Magallanes which they cannot find.
They return home by an unknown way, never
Navigated before.

SUnday November the sixth, this morning we had lost
the sight of land, so that we could see it no more. All
the night last past, and this day, we were under our two
Courses and Sprit-sail. The weather this day was hasey.
My reckoning was a S.W. half South way, and by it twenty
one Leagues. We had now an indifferent high Sea,
and a fresh wind at N.N.W.

November the seventh, last night was both rainy and fog-

Variation of
the Needle
found here.
gey, but in the morning it cleared up. The wind for the
most part was at W. and W. N.W. But at noon it came
about at W. S. W. Our reckoning was a S. W. by S. way,
and by it twenty Leagues. We found by observation Lat.
52 d. 03. We now steered away S.S.E. the wind being at
that time at W.S.W. In the evening of this day I found
a variation of the Needle to N.E. to the number of 15 d.
or better. I was still troubled with the Gripes as I had
been before.

November the eighth, we had a fair night the last past.
About midnight the wind came to N.N.W. This day early,
at the break of day, we all were perswaded that we had
seen Land, but at noon we saw that it was none, but only
a Cloud. The wind was now at North. My reckoning
was a S.E. half East way, and thirty two leagues and one
third of a league. We had an observation that gave us 53
d. 27 South. The whole day was very fine and warm, and
we saw great numbers of Fowles and Seales.

November the ninth, yesterday in the evening the weather


190

Page 190
was cloudy. Hereupon we lay by under a main-course.
After midnight we sailed East, and E. by N. with a fresh
wind at W. N. W. and not any great Sea. The day it self
was cloudy, and toward noon we had some rain. So at two
in the afternoon we lay by under a Main-course, the wind
being fresh at N. W. I reckoned an E. N. E. way, and
thereby twenty eight Leagues.

A storm.
Thursday November the tenth, all the night last past we
lay under a Main-course, with a meer fret of wind at N.W.
and N.N.W. Day being come, the wind did rather encrease;
insomuch, that about noon our sail blew to pieces.
Hereupon we were forced to lower the yard, and unbend
the sail, lying for a little while under a Mizen. But that
also soon gave way. So that all the rest of this day we
lay a hull in very dark weather, foggy and windy, with a
huge sea, which often times rowled over us. In the afternoon
it seemed to abate for some space of time; but soon
after it blew worse than before, which compelled us to
lower our Fore-yard.

It continueth
all night and
next day.
November the tenth, all the night last past we had furious
windy and tempestuous weather, from the points of
N.W. and N. N. W. together with Seas higher and higher.
In the evening we set our Mizen. At which time the Sun
appeared very waterish; but the wind now abated by degrees,
and the Seas also.

November the twelfth, this morning little wind was stiring,
but only some rain fell. About ten it cleared up, and
by an observation then made, we found Lat. 55 d. 25. The
Sea was now much fallen, and a fresh wind was sprung up
at W. and W.S. W. We experimented also a very great
current to the S. W. In the afternoon of this day we set
our sails again, resolving now unanimously together, to
make for the Straights of St. Vincent, otherwise called the
Straights of Fernando de Magallanes. We had a fresh wind
at W.N.W. our course being S.S.E. under our Sprit-sail, Fore-

Paxaros Ninos
seen at Sea.
sail, and Fore-top-sail. This day we saw many Fishes, or
rather Fowls, who had heads like unto Muscovia Ducks, as

191

Page 191
also two feet like unto them. They had two Fins like the
fore-fins of Turtles: white breasts and bellies; their beak
and eyes being red. They are full of Feathers on their bodies,
and their hinder parts are like unto those of a Seal,
wherewith they cut the water. The Spaniard calleth
these Fowles Paxaros Ninos. They weigh most commonly
about six or seven pound, being about one foot, a little
more or less in length. Our Commander Captain Sharp,
had so much dexterity as to strike two of them. In the
evening we set also our Main-sail; the wind now coming
to the Southward of the West.

Sunday November the 13th, all the night past we had a
fresh wind between S.W. and W.N.W. with sometimes mists
of small rain. In the evening we enjoyed a fine leading
gale at W. N. W. together with both clear and wholesome
weather. We made a S.E. way, and by it forty two leagues
and two thirds. This day an observation gave us Lat. 56
d. 55 South. We still experimented a great S. W. current.
In the afternoon of this day we steered E.S.E. and in the evening
had whiffling winds.

November the 14th, both last night and this morning we
had cloudy weather. About eight it cleared up. My
reckoning was a S.E. by E. way, and by it thirty two leagues.
Our observation gave us Lat. 57 d. 50. South. This day

They see Land.
we could perceive land, and at noon were due West from
it. In the evening we stood E. by S.

November the 15th, all the night past was very cloudy.

But lose it again.

We judged now that we should be close in with the Land
we had seen the day before, but the morning being come
we could see none. In the night much snow fell, and in
the day we had great fleets thereof, the weather being very
cold and cloudy. I reckoned an E.S.E. way, and hereby
twenty nine leagues and two thirds. Moreover, that our
Latitude was 58 d. 25 S. The wind was now so fresh at
North, that we were forced to lye under our two Courses
and Sprit-sail.

Novembe the 16th, most of this time we had still rain


192

Page 192
and snow, but now no night at all, though the weather was
dark. The wind was various, but from midnight before
They alter
their course.
this day, the wind was at S.E. and S.S.E. We now lay E.N.E.
I reckoned a N.E. by E. way, and twenty three leagues.
About four in the afternoon two of our fore-shrouds bolts
broke, but withal, were presently mended. This afternoon
also we saw a very large Whale. In the evening we
A Whale seen.
handed in our fore-top sail, and lay under our pair of Courses,
and Sprit-sail, the evening being very clear.

Great Islands
of Ice.
November the 17th, in the night past there was a very
hard frost. At four this morning we saw two or three Islands
of Ice, the distance of two or three leagues to the
Southward of us. Soon after this, we saw several others,
the biggest of them being at least two leagues round. By
an observation made this day, we found Lat. 58 d. 23
South. We had now a vehement current to the Southward.
At noon I saw many others of these Islands of Ice
afore-mentioned, of which some were so long, that we could
scarce see the end of them, and were extant about ten or
twelve fathom above water. The weather in the mean
while was very clear, and the wind cold. I found variati-
Variation of
the Needle.
on of the Needle eighteen degrees to the North East.

November the 18th, all the night past was very fair. I

No night hereabouts.

must call it night; for otherwise it was not dark at all.
The Sea was very smooth, and the wind at N. and N.N.W.
I reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and by the same twenty two
leagues. At ten it grew stark calme, which held all the
afternoon of this day. But at night we had a wind again at
N. and N. by E.

November the 19th, this day was cloudy with snow, and
a frosty night preceeding it. The wind now was so fresh at
North, that we were forced to take in our top-sails, and
lye all day under our Courses and Sprit-sail. We made by
an E.S.E. way, eighteen leagues and two thirds.

A great fog.
November the twentieth, we had a cloudy night the last
past, together with misling rain and snow. This morning
fell so great a fog, that we could not see from stem to stern

193

Page 193
of our ship. From ten of the clock last night we had also
a calm and very cold weather. But what was worse than
A short allowance.

all this, we were now kept to a very short allowance of our
sorry victuals; our Provisions growing very scanty with
us. About ten this morning we had a very small breeze
at North. Several of our men were not able to endure the
Extremity of
cold.
cold, so fierce it was, whereby they were forced to lye and
keep themselves as close as they could. We made an East
way, and by the same sixteen leagues. This day at noon
I reckoned my self to be East from the Gulf, from whence
we last departed, two hundred and five leagues and two
thirds of a league.

Munday November the 21, last evening we caught a

Land Fowles
seen yet no
Land.
small and white land fowl, and saw two or three more;
and also this morning. This sight afforded us good hopes
we were not far distant from some Coast or other, yet none
we could see in all this long and tedious voyage. In the
night past we had a calme, and all this morning a great fog
with much snow and rain. We reckoned an E. by N. way,
and ten leagues. At one in the afternoon we had a fresh
gale that sprang up at East, and at E. by N.

November the 22, most part of this day was calme. In
the mean while we could observe our ship to drive East.
My reckoning was an E. N. E. way, and thereby thirteen
leagues and one third. At one in the afternoon we had a
small gale at W. S. W. our course being N. N. E. and N. E.
by N.

November the 23, this day we had a gale at N.W. and
freshning still more and more; so that we were forced to
take in our top-sails and sprit-sail. The wind was not a setled
gale, but often varied from point to point. At noon
it came at N. E. and our course was then N. N. W. By a
North way we reckoned sixteen leagues.

November the 24th, both the night past and this morning
was foggy weather, with some calmes between times.
But at eight in the morning the Sun brake out, though
notwithstanding the day was not clear. By a N.N.E. way


194

Page 194
we reckoned fifteen leagues. This morning the wind came
about to East, and by noon it was again at N.E. We had
a clear evening and a fresh gale.

November the 25th, all the night past we had a fresh
wind at E. and E.N.E. Insomuch, that at eight in the morning
we took in our top-sails. But at noon the wind was
not so fresh as it had been before. I reckoned a N.N.W.
half West way, and by the same twenty leagues.

November the 26th, last night the wind was not altogether
so fresh as before; but this morning it was again very
high. The weather was both dark and cloudy, and
brought now and then rain and snow. We made a N.N.E.
way, and hereby thirty leagues. The wind all along E. by
S. and E. S. E. In the evening we had fair weather again.
We experimented for the ten days last past a great Western
Sea, and saw in the same time several Seals.

Sunday November the 27th, all the night past we enjoyed
a fresh gale and clear weather. I reckoned thirty six

30 d. variation
of the Needle.

leagues by a N. E. by N. way. By an observation made,
we now found Lat. 52 d. 48 South. And I judged my self
to be East from the Gulf, two hundred eighty five leagues.
In the evening of this day we had a very exact sight of the
Sun, and found above 30 d. variation of the Needle. From
Observation.
whence ought to be concluded, that it is very difficult to
direct a course of Navigation in these parts. For in the
space of only twenty five leagues sailing, we have experimented
eight or nine degrees difference of variation, by a
good Dutch Azimouth Compass.

More land
Fowles seen,
but no land.
November the 28th, all last night we had a fresh wind at
E.S.E. Towards morning we had but little wind, all the
day being hasey weather. This day we saw a whole flight
of such Land-fowles, of which sort we killed one before, as
was mentioned above. This sight gave us occasion to believe,
that neither then, nor at this present, we were not
far distant from land, and yet we descryed none in the residue
of this whole voyage. We made by a N. N. E. way,
thirty three leagues. Yesterday in the evening we set a

195

Page 195
new sprit-sail, and about three this morning we also set our
main-sail. At one after-noon, the wind came about N. E.
and N. N. E. which in the evening blew very fresh, with
cloudy weather.

November the 29th. The night proved very cloudy,
and the wind blew very fresh at E. N. E. and N. E. by
E. This morning it was at East, both with snow, and
hail. Towards noon the weather cleared up, and we
found by an observation taken, Lat. 49 D 45 S. Our
reckoning was a North way, and thirty leagues. This
day we had a short Eastern sea, and withal, a very cold evening.
I took the Sun, and hereby I found variation 26
D. 30. unto the North East. This night the wind came
about W. and W. N. W. continuing so all the night.

November the 30th. This day the wind was N. and
N. N. E. with some clouds hovering in the sky. At this
time we had already almost four hours of night. The

Four hours of
night.
morning of this day was very fair and clear. Hereupon
for to give my self satisfaction in the point, as fearing
the truth of Spanish Books; I worked the true Amplitude
of the Sun, and found his variation to be 26 25 to
the N. E. being very conformable to what I had both read
and experimented before. Hereabouts, also we experimented
a current to the Northward. Moreover, this day
we saw much rock-weed, which renewed our hopes, once
Rock-weed.
more of seeing land. We reckoned a N. E. way and by
the same twenty two leagues. By an observation made
we found Lat. 48 D. 53 S. This day also we saw several
of those fowl-fish afore described called Paxaros-ninos; and
Paxaros-ninis
these of a larger size, than any we had seen before. In
the afternoon, the wind came about at N. N. E. whereby
we stood N. W. by W. with a fresh gale, and smooth water.
The weather now began to grow warmer, then hetherto,
and the evening of this day was clear.

Tuesday December the first. The latter part of the
night past was very cloudy, and also sometimes rainy.
About midnight we had a furious and violent Tornado,

Several Tornados.


196

Page 196
forcing us in a moment to hand in our top-sails. At five
in the morning we set them again, and at eleven, we had
another Tornado, forcing us to hand our top-sails the second
time. We made a N. N. E. two thirds East way,
and thereby thirteen leagues and two thirds of a league.
The afternoon of this stormy day, proved very fair, and
the wind came to W. S. W. our course being N. E. by N.
In the evening the wind freshned, with cloudy weather.

Which continue
December the second. Last night we experimented a
very furious whirle-wind, which notwithstanding, it pleased
God, did pass about the length of our ship, to Westward
of us. However, we handed in our top-sails, and
halled up our low-sails, in the brails. After the whirlewind
came a fresh storm of large hail-stones, in the night,
and several Tornados; but God be thanked, they all came
large of our ship. We now made a great way under a
fore-course and sprit-sail. At four of the clock this morning,
our fore-sail split, whereby we were forced to lower
our fore-yard. At half an hour after ten we hoysted it again
with a furious S. W. wind. We made a N. E. by E.
way, and by the same forty seven leagues and an half. By
observation we now had Lat. 46 D. 54 S. We riffed our
fore-sail, with respect to the violence of the wind. But in
the evening, this rather increased, and we had a very great
Sea. Our standing rigging, through the fury of this gale,
gave way in several places, but was soon mended again.

Warm weather
December the third. The wind all the night past, was
very fresh, with several flaws both of wind and rain, at S.
W. and S. W. by S. We enjoyed now very warm weather.
This morning we set our fore-top-sail. Our reckoning
gave us, a N. E. half E. way and forty five leagues.
We found Lat. by observation 45 D. 28 S. This day at
Porpusses.
noon, a large shoal of young Porpusses came about our ship,
and played up and down.

December the 4th. All the night past we had a fresh
gale at W. S. W. The night was clear, onely that now
and then we had a small cloud affording some rain. In


197

Page 197
the morning, from four of the clock till eight it rained.
But then it cleared up again, with a S. W. wind and a very
smooth sea. We made by a N. E. one quarter N. way,
thirty nine leagues. By observation we found Lat. 44
D. 01 S. At noon the wind came to S. S. W. our course
then being N. N. E. This day we agreed among our selves
having the consent of our commander, to share the eight
A dividend
made of eight
chests of mony.
chests of money, which as yet were remaining unshared.
Yesterday in the evening, we let out the reiff of our foresail,
and hoysted up our fore-yard. This evening I found
variation 17 D. N. E.

Munday, December the 5th. All the night past, a
clear night, and this a fair day, with a fresh wind at S. S.
W. We reckoned a N. E. 5. D. N. way, and by the same
forty two leagues. An observation gave us Lat. 42 D.
29. S. This afternoon we shared of the chests abovemen-

300 p. 8. to
each man.
tioned, three hundred pieces of eight each man. I now
reckoned my self to be East from my departure four hundred
seventy one leagues and one third of a league. At
night again we shared twenty two pieces of eight more to
each.

December the 6th. We had a clear star-light-night the
last and a fair morning this day, with a fresh gale at S. W.
At noon we took in our fore-top-sail. We reckoned a N.
E. half N. way, and hereby fifty leagues and two thirds.
An observation taken afforded us 40 D. 31 S. This evening
was cloudy.

December the 7th. The night was both windy and
cloudy. At one in the morning, we took in our top-sails,
and at three, handed our sprit-sail, and so we scudded away
before the wind, which now was very fresh at West.
This morning a gust of wind came and tore our main-sail
into an hundred pieces, which made us put away before
the wind, till we could provide for that accident. My
reckoning was a N. E. three quarters E. way, and by the
same thirty three leagues. By observation we found Lat.
39 D. 37 S. We had now a great Sea, and a fresh wind.


198

Page 198
At three in the afternoon we set another fore-sail; the first
being blown to pieces. Moreover, at the same time we
furled our sprit-sail. At five the wind came at W. S. W.
with very bad weather. This day our worthy comman-
A plot against
Captain
Sharp
discovered.
der Captain Sharp, had very certain intelligence given him,
that on Christmas-day, which was, now at hand, the
company, or at least a great part thereof, had a design to
shoot him; he having appointed that day some time
since to be merry. Hereupon he made us share the wine
amongst us, as being perswaded they would scarce attempt
any such thing in their sobriety. The wine we shared fell
out to three jarrs unto each mess. That night the wind
encreased.

December the 8th. The night past was both cloudy
and windy; the wind often varying between the N. W.
and S. W. points. This morning it varyed between W.
and N. W. by W. About noon this day, we brought a
new main-sail to the yard, but did not set it then, by reason
there blowed too much wind. I reckoned a N. E.
half N. way, and by the same thirty leagues. By observation
made we found Lat. 38 D. 29 S. In the afternoon
we had one or two squalls of wind and rain; but the violence
of both fell at stern of us. In the evening it blew
again very hard. I observed this day, the rising and set-

The variation.
ting of the Sun, and found the exact variation to be 12
D. 15 N. E.

December the 9th. The night was starry-light, but
withal, very windy. About the break of day, the wind
came to N. W. and at seven we set our fore-top-sail, and
stood N. N. E. with not much wind. We made since our
last reckoning a N. E. quarter E. way, and twenty nine
leagues. We found by observation Lat. 37 D. 30 S. The

Their Vessel is
leaky.
sea was much fallen, but our ship now began to complain
of several leakes, through our tedious and long Voyage.
This afternoon we hoysted up our main-yard and set up
back-stays and main-swifter; whose ring-bolt gave way,
but was mended. In the evening of this day we had but
little wind.


199

Page 199

December the 10th. The night was very clear, but till
ten of the clock this forenoon, we had no wind. Then a
small breeze sprang up at N. and N. by E. We made an
E. N. E. one third N. way, and hereby twenty one leagues.
An observation gave us Lat. 37 D. 01 S. In the afternoon
of this day our chief Surgeon cut off the foot of a Negro

The foot of a
Negro cut off.
boy, which was perished with cold. Now it was like to
be bad weather again. Hereupon we furled our top-sails,
and lay under a pair of courses. But in the evening we
lay under a fore-sail and mizen, with misty weather.

Sunday, December the 11th. All the night past, we had
a fresh wind at N. and sometimes at N. N. W. The weather
was very cloudy with drizling rain. We made an
E. way, and thereby twenty five leagues. This day
brought a great sea. About ten in the morning, one of
our main shrouds gave way. In the evening fell some
small rain.

December the 12th. All the night past we had misty
rain, and but little wind; yea, in the morning a perfect
calm. At noon came up a small gale at E. S. E. and S. E.
bringing with it cloudy weather. We reckoned a N. E.
by E. way, and by the same eighteen leagues. Yesterday
dyed the Negro boy whose leg was cut off by our Surgeon,

Two Negro's
dye.
as was mentioned the day before. This afternoon also dyed
another Negro, something bigger than the former, named
Chepillo. The boy's name was Beafero. All this evening
but small wind.

December the 13th. All night the wind was at E. S.
E. our course being N. N. E. At three in the morning it
came about at S. S. W. and at nine at E. by N. I reckoned
a N. E. by N. way, and fifteen leagues. The weather
was hasey. In the afternoon the wind was at N. E. our
course being N. N. W. We enjoyed now a very smooth
sea, and saw multitudes of Grampusses, Whales, and Por-

Grampusses,
Whales, and
Porpusses.
pusses, every day as we sailed along.

December the 14th. The evening past was cloudy, as
also the night foggy. Hereupon we took in our top-sails.


200

Page 200
At half an hour after three this morning, we stood N. E.
the wind being then at N. N. W. At five we put out our
top-sails again. At seven of the morning, we saw a Turtle
floating upon the sea. We reckoned a N. N. E. way.
This days observation afforded us 34 D. 32. S. At this
Very hot weather.

time we had very hot weather, and great dews in the
night. My whole Easting I reckoned to be now, six
hundred seventy seven leagues and one third of a
league.

December the 15th. We had a fine night the last past,
and a great dew. The wind in the interim was between
N. and N. W. I reckoned a N. E. half E. way, and by the
same thirty one leagues. We had an observation that
gave us Lat. 33 D. 46 S. At noon the wind came about
at N. N. W. our course being N. E. We had this day a
very clear evening, and at the same time a fresh wind.

December the 16th. We had a fair night and wind at
N. N. W. and N. W. by N. This morning I took the

Variation of
the Needle.
Sun at its rising, and found N. E. variation 20 D. 30. My
reckoning was a N. N. E. way, and thirty six leagues and
one third of another. By observation I found Lat. 32 D.
09 S. At noon this day the wind came about to N. W.

December the 17th. Most part of the last night, the
wind was at N. W. as before. But towards morning a
a fine and easie gale sprang up at W. N. W. This mor-

Dolphins seen.
ning we saw several Dolphins playing upon the sea, which
made us hope they would at last befriend us, and suddainly
shew us some land or other. We reckoned a N. E. by
N. one third N. way, and by the same twenty five leagues.
An observation gave us, now Lat. 31 D. 04. A fair evening.

December the 18th. We had a clear night past, together
with a smooth gale at N. W. which this morning was
at W. by S. We had now a smooth sea, for several days
past. Our reckoning was twenty five leagues, by a N.
E. by N. way. By observation we perceive Lat. 29 D.
48 S.


201

Page 201

December the 19th. A clear night the last past, and a
fresh breeze at S. S. W. and S. W. by E. lasting untill nine
in the morning. Then sprang up a wind at S. E. by E.
I reckoned this day a N. N. E. half E. way, and upon the
same thirty leagues. By observation made, we took Lat.
28 D. 29 S. The day was very fair, and a smooth sea,
with weather that was very hot. My whole Easting I

Very hot weather.

reckoned now to be seven hundred and sixty leagues.
This evening I found variation 02 D. 50 N. E.

CHAP. XXV.

The Bucaniers continue their Navigation, without
seeing any Land, till they arrive at the
Caribby
Islands in the West Indies. They give away
their Ship to some of their Companions that were
poor; and disperce for several Countrys. The
Author of this Journal arriveth in
England.

DEcember the 20th, 1681. The night before this
day was something cloudy, but the weather was
fair and the wind but little. At noon the wind came about
N. by E. our course being W. N. W. We made a
N. N. W. way, and thereby as I reckoned twenty two
leagues. By an observation made we took Lat. 27 D. 25
S. The evening of this day was cloudy, and now and then
there fell a shower of rain.

December the 21st. At eight of the clock last night,
the wind came N. W. by N. but withal, with such dark
weather, that we were forced to take in our top-sails. The
night was something rainy, and the weather, this morning
calm and rainy. About ten we had a small breeze at
N. W. We reckoned a N. by E. way, and by the same sixteen
leagues. The afternoon of this day was calm and
still.


202

Page 202

December the 22d. We had a fair and clear night the
last past, which produced this day a sinooth sea, and ex-

Extream hot
weather.
tream hot weather, and very little wind near the Sun; so
that no observation was made.

December the 23d. The night was very fair. At midnight
or thereabouts, a fresh gale sprang up at S. E. and E.
S. E. which sometime was E. This freshned by degrees.
We had in the day very hot and clear weather. By a
N. way I reckoned fifteen leagues.

December the 24. Last night we had both a fresh
gale, and a clear night. The wind was at E. by S. We
reckoned a N. E. by E. way, and by it thirty one leagues.

Christmas-day.
Sunday, December the 25th. This day being Christmas-day,
for celebration of that great festival, we killed
yesterday in the evening a sow. This sow we had brought
from the Gulf of Nicoya, being then a sucking pig of three
weeks old, more or less, but now weighed about four-
The weather
extream hot.
score and ten pound. With this hogs-flesh we made our
Christmas-dinner, being the onely flesh we had eaten ever
since we turned away our prizes under the Æquinoctial,
and left the Island of Plata. We had this day several flaws
of wind, and some rain; but the weather otherwise was
pretty clear. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and thirty three
leagues by the same. It was now also extream hot weather,
as we signified before.

December the 26th. We had this day several gusts of
wind, which forced us to stand by our top-sails. Yet
were they but very short, and all the rest of the while we
enjoyed an indifferent fresh gale at E. and E. by S. We
reckoned a N. by E. way, and twenty eight leagues.

December the 27th. We had fair weather, and a fresh
wind at E. and E. by S. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and
upon the same thirty two leagues. The evening of this
day was cloudy.

December the 28. Last night was cloudy with a fresh
wind. We reckoned a N. E. way, and by the same forty
six leagues. We found by an observation made Lat. 15


203

Page 203
D. 30 S. My whole Easting I reckoned this day to be
eight hundred and twenty five leagues. Now we saw
much flying-fish, with some Dolphins, Bonito's, and Albi-
Much fish seen.
cores; but they will not take the hook.

December the 29th. All last night was cloudy, with a
fresh wind between E. and E. S. E. The weather all the
afternoon was hasey. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and
hereupon forty leagues and one third. In the afternoon
we had a S. E. by E. wind, which blew very fresh. The
evening was clear. At Sunset I found variation to N. W.

Variation.
04 D. 19.

December the 30th. The night past was cloudy. Towards
morning the wind came about at E. At six it
came E. S. E. and at ten to S. E. by S. We made a N. by
E. way, and forty three leagues. By observation we found
Lat. 11 D. 03 S. The evening of this day was clear.

December the 31st. We had a cloudy night the last
past, but the morning was hasey. We came now, to a
strict allowance of onely three good pints of water each
day. We made a N. by E. way, and found Lat. by observation
08 D. 55 S. In the afternoon we had an E. S. E.
and S. E. by E. wind. My whole Easting I reckoned now
to be eight hundred eighty four leagues and one third. At
noon we stood away N. W.

Sunday, January the first 1681. All the night past
was cloudy, as this day also with some showers of rain.
We made a N. W. one eight N. way, and forty leagues.
In the afternoon came about a fresh wind at S. E. and E.
S. E.

January the 2d. The weather this day was both dull
and cloudy. We reckoned a N. W. one quarter N. way,
and by the same thirty two leagues. By observation we
found, that our Lat. now was 06 D. 06 S. The wind came
pretty fresh at S. E.

January the 3d. We had several squalls of wind, and
some rain. But, withal a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E.
Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and thirty


204

Page 204
four leagues. The afternoon was clear, but the evening
cloudy.

January the 4th. All the night past was very cloudy;
but this forenoon it cleared up. Yesterday we put abroad
our main-top-sail, studden-sails; but took them in
at night. At four this morning we set our larboard studden-sail,
and before noon sitted up top-gallant masts, and
yard. We made a N. W. way, and by it forty leagues and
two thirds. By observation we had now Lat. 03 D. 09
S. This afternoon also, we set our top-gallant-sail, being
forced to make out all its running rigging. The wind
was pretty fresh at S. E. and S. E. by E.

January the 5th. Most part of the night past was
clear, and star-light, though with some rain towards the
morning. This being come, we put out our top-gallantsail,
and both our top-sail, studden-sails. At noon likewise,
we put up our fore-top-gallant masts, and yard. We

A huge Albicore
taken.
caught an Albicore, this day, weighing about one hundred
and twenty pound weight. The wind was at S. E.
by S. and S. S. E. We made a N. W. way, and reckoned
thereby thirty five leagues. By observation we found
Lat. 02 D. 03 S. We had now mighty hot weather.

January the 6th. Yesterday in the evening we

Another small
one.
caught another Albicore which weighed onely eight or
nine pound weight. We made a N. W. way, and reckoned
thirty five leagues, as before. Now by an observation
made, we could perceive onely Lat. 00 D. 49 S. The evening
of this day was very clear.

January the 7th. The wind was variable between S.
S. E. and S. S. W. though not altogether so fresh as before.
Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and
thirty six leagues by the same. This day an observation

They paβ the
Æquinoctial.
gave us Lat. 00 D. 32 N. of the Æquinoctial, which now
we had passed again. In the afternoon of this day we
An Albicore of
135 l.
caught another Albicore which weighed more than the
first we took; that is, between one hundred thirty five,
and one hundred and forty pound. But little wind stirring
this afternoon.


205

Page 205

January the 8th. This evening last past, we had little
better than a calm. At nine this morning, we had a fresh
wind at S. S. E. with dark weather, so that we thought it
convenient, to take in our main-top-sail. But, at noon
we set it again, and also, our larboard top-studden-sail with
both top-gallant-sails. We made a N. W. way, and by it
thirty four leagues. By an observation made we found
Lat. 01 D. 55 N. We had now extream hot weather, and
a very small allowance of water.

January the 9th. Last night we took in top-sails all
night, the wind then whiffling between S. and W. points.
We had nowithstanding, for the most part very little wind.
The morning of this day was rainy, and thereupon, with
good diligence, we saved a bompkin of water. There was
now a great ripling sea, rising very high; and it is reported,
that sometimes and somewhere hereabouts, is to be
seen an enchanted Island; which others say, and dare assert,

An enchantea
Island.
that they have sailed over. I reckoned a N. W. by N. one
quarter N. way, and twenty five leagues. This afternoon
we had very dark and calm weather, looking, as if we
should have much rain. Now, reckoning up my meridian
I found my self E. from my departure, seven hundred
and two leagues. In the evening we had very rainy weather
and a cockling sea.

January the 10th. All the night past was cloudy. About
midnight sprang up a small breeze varying all round
the compass. At five this morning we had a breeze at S.
E. and a very clear sky, which afterwards continued to
freshen, with the same clearness as before. We made a N.
W. by N. one quarter N. way, and by the same two leagues
and two thirds. By a clear observation we had now Lat.
03 D. 16 N. At four this evening the wind was at E. S.
E. the weather being violent hot; in so much, that our allowance
of water was tedious unto us for its shortness.
At the same time we had an indifferent smooth sea from
the E.

January the 11th. All the night past we had little or


206

Page 206
no wind. But about two in the morning, the wind freshned
again at E. N. E. and brought both a clear and hot day.
We made twenty three leagues by a N. W. one quarter W.
way. This days observation gave us Lat. 04 D. 06. N.
In the afternoon we had a shower of rain; and afterward
a fresh wind at E. N. E. But the evening grew dull.

January the 12th. In the night past we had two or
three squalls of wind, and some showers of rain. In the
mean while the wind blew fresh at N. E. and N. E. by E.
as it also continued to do in the day. I reckoned a N. W.
way, and forty four leagues and one third. Our observation
this day gave us 05 D. 49 N. Yesterday and to day
we set our main-top-sail. Now I could not finde much

Little or no
variation.
variation of the needle.

January the 13th. We had a fresh gale all the last night,
but more Northerly than before; for now it was N. E. by
N. We reckoned a W. N. W. way, and thereupon ——
leagues and two thirds. An observation taken shewed us
Lat. 06 D. 41 N. We had a N. N. E. sea and very clear
weather.

January the 14th. We had a clear night the last, and a
fresh wind at E. N. E. We made a N. W. one fifth W.
way, and thirty eight leagues. By observation we found
Lat. 07 D. 46 N. We had a smooth sea; and now we
were come to onely three horns of water a day, which

Their allowance
shortned.
made in all but a quart allowance for each man. The evening
was clear, and we had a fresh wind.

Sunday, January the 15th. The night past was clear,
and the wind fresh at E.N.E. and again at N.E. by E. very

One of their
men dyeth.
fresh. About eleven of the clock at night, dyed one of
our companions, named William Stephens. It was commonly
believed that he poysoned himself with Manzanilla
in Golfo dulce, for he never had been in health since that
time. This forenoon was cloudy. We reckoned forty
four leagues and a N. W. way. An observation gave us
this day 09 D. 18 N. All the last night we kept out our topgallant-sails.
We saw hereabouts, many flying-fish being

207

Page 207
very large in size. This morning also, we threw over
board our dead man, and gave him two French volly's and
one English one. I found now again very small variation.

January the 16th. We had a clear night, and a very
fresh wind at N. E. and E. N. E. with a long homeing sea.
My reckoning was a N. W. one seventh W. way, and thereby
forty eight leagues and one third. The observation
made this day gave us Lat. 10 D. 48 N. I reckoned my
self now, East from my departure five hundred fifty three
leagues. We had a cloudy evening.

January the 17th. All the night past we enjoyed a
fresh wind, and so this day also, at N. E. by N. We made
a N. W. half W. way, and thereupon forty seven leagues
and one third of a league. By observation we found Lat.
12 D. 19 N. We had now a long North sea. At noon
this day we steered away N. N. W. The day was very
hot, but the night both cool and dewy.

January the 18th. All the night past was both cloudy
and windy. At six this morning our sprit-sail-top-mast
broke. I reckoned a W. N. W. way, and forty eight
leagues by the same. We found by observation Lat. 13
D. 12 N. At noon we steered away W. the wind being
at N. E. fresh, with a clear evening.

January the 19th. We had a clear night the last, and a
fresh wind at E. N. E. which sometimes came in pushes.
Our reckoning was a W. half Southerly way, and by the
same forty six leagues. We found by observation Lat. 13
D. 01 N. Yesterday in the evening we put up a new
sprit-sail-top-mast; with a fine smooth gale at N. E. by E.

January the 20th. The night past was clear, and not
very fresh; but at day-break it freshened again. Last night
we saw a great shoal of fish; whereof we caught none, by
reason the Porpusses frightened them from us, as they ofttimes
had done before. Yesterday in the evening also, we
saw a Man of War-Fowl, and that gave us good hopes we

A Man of WarFowl.

should er'e long see land. These hopes, and the great desires
we had to end our voyage; gave us occasion this day

208

Page 208
to put in, or stake down, each man of our company a
A reward to
him that first
seeth land.
piece of eight for a reward unto him, that should first
discover land. We reckoned a W. one sixth Northerly
way, and by it thirty eight leagues. An observation gave
us this day Lat. 13 D. 11 N. The wind was at N. E. and
E. N. E. This day we passed over many riplings, and
Porpusses hinder
their fishing.

also saw many multitudes of fish; but the Porpusses did
always hinder us of having any good of them.

On January the 21st. We made a W. way, and reckoned
forty seven leagues. By observation we found Lat. 13
D. 07 N. The wind was at E. N. E. and from thence
came a long sea. The evening was very clear.

January the 22d. We had a fair and a clear day, the
wind being at E. We reckoned a W. by N. one third W.
way, and forty leagues. An observation shewed us Lat.
13 D. 17 N. We had a clear evening, and a fresh wind at
E. N. E.

January the 23d. This day was both clear and hot,
with a fresh wind at E. N. E. My reckoning was a W.
way, and forty six leagues. Our observation made this
day afforded us Lat. 13 D. 15 N. In the evening we had
some rain.

January the 24th. This day brought us likewise clear
weather, such as the day before. I reckoned a W. way,
and forty leagues and one third. By observation we found
Lat. 13 D. 12. N. The afternoon was cloudy, and had
some rain, the wind freshning at E.N.E. and at E. by N. I
reckoned now, that I was East from my departure three
hundred and eleven leagues. We had a cloudy evening.

January the 25th. Both last night and this morning
the weather was cloudy. This morning we saw several

Tropick-birds
seen.
Tropick-birds of divers sorts. Our reckoning was a W.
three quarters N. way, and forty three leagues. We found
by observation Lat. 13 D. 29 N. This afternoon we saw
A Booby seen.
a Booby flying close aboard the Horison. The weather
They look out
sharp for land.
was hasey. But now we began to look out sharp on all
sides for land, expecting to see it every minute. I reckoned

209

Page 209
my self to be Eastward of my departure two hundred
sixty eight leagues.

January the 26th. The night last past was indifferent
clear. Yet not withstanding, this morning we had a smart
shower of rain, and it was very windy. Hereupon we
furled our sprit sail, the weather being very hasey to the
Westward. We reckoned a W. way, and thereby forty six
leagues and one third. By observation taken we found
Lat. 13 D. 17. N. At noon this day, we had a very
fierce Tornado, and rain together; but withal, a clear af-

A fierce Tornado.

ternoon. We had a high E N. E. sea; and saw multitudes
of flying-fish, also several fowls, and amongst these,
two or three Booby's. The evening was hasey.

January the 27th. All night past we had a fresh wind,
and clear weather. This morning our fore-top-mast
back-stay gave way, and at day-break, the star-board-sheet
of our fore-top-sail brake. We had several Tornado's this
day, and dark weather. Our reckoning was a W. way,
and forty eight leagues by the same. We had a clear evening,
and a dark night. This day also a certain bird,
called a Noddy, came on board us, which we took for a

A Noddy cometh
aboard.
certain token that we were not, now very far from land.

Saturday, January the 28th. We had a very clear
night the last past. About an hour before day one of our
company happened to descry land, which proved to be the

They descry the
Island of
Barbado's.

Island of Barbado's, at S. S. W. from us, and at two leagues
and an half distance, more or less. Hereupon we clapt on
a wind, N. and by W. At day-break we were onely four
leagues distant from Chalky-Mount, at which time we stood
S. W. by S. As we sailed we saw several ships at anchor
in Spikes-Road. Soon after a Shalop passed by, between
us and the shoar, but would not come within call of us.
Hereupon we stood in, within a mile of the shore; and
made a wiff unto a Pinnace which we saw coming out of
the road aforementioned. She came close aboard us, and
as it should seem, was the Barge of one of his Majesties
Frigats, the Richmond then lying at the Bridge-town at
They are affraid
of the
Richmond-Frigat.


210

Page 210
anchor. They told us of a peace at home, but would not
come on board us, though often invited thereunto. Neither
dared we be so bold, as to put in there at Barbado's;
for hearing of a Frigat lying there, we feared least the said
Frigat should seize us for Privateers, and for having acted
in all our voyage without Commission. Thus we stood
They bear away
for
Antego.

away from thence for the Island of Antego.

Here I cannot easily express the infinit joy we were
possessed withal, this day to see our own country-men again.
They told us that a ship, which we saw in the
offing to leward of the Island, was a Bristol-man, and an
Interloper; but, we feared that same vessel, to be the
Frigat aforementioned. I reckoned a way of twenty five
leagues. So that I was now by my account, to Eastward
of my departure one hundred fifty one leagues. Now we
stood N. by W. and by observation found Lat. 13 D. 17
N. we being then N. W. from the body of the Island of
Barbado's, between seven and eight leagues. This after-

They give liberty
to a Negro.

noon we freed the Negro who was our shooemaker by
his trade, giving him his liberty for the good service he had
done us in all the course of this voyage. We gave also
unto our good commander Captain Sharp, a Mulato boy,
as a free gift of the whole company, for to wait upon him,
in token of the respects we all were owing unto him, for
the safety of our conduct through so many dangerous adventures.
This being done, we shared some small parcels
of money, that had not as yet been touched of our former
The last dividend
made.
prizes; and this dividend amounted unto twenty four
pieces of eight each man.

At one of the clock this day, from our fore-yard we de-

Island of Santa
Lucia.
scryed the Island of Santa Lucia, being one of the Western
Islands, not far distant from that of Barbados. I had omitted
to tell a passage which happened in our ship, on
Thursday last, which was the 26th day of this Month, and
just two days before we made the Island aforementioned
A Dog sold for
40 p. 8.
of Barbados. On that day therefore a little Spanish shockDog,
which we had found in our last Wine-prize, taken

211

Page 211
under the Æquinoctial, and had kept alive till now, was
sold at the mast by publick cry, for forty pieces of eight,
his owner saying that all he could get for him should be
spent upon the company at a publick merriment. Our
commander Captain Sharp bought the Dog, with intention
to eat him, in case we did not see land very soon. This
money therefore, with one hundred pieces of eight more,
which our Boatswain, Carpinter and Quartermaster had
refused to take at this last dividend, for some quarrel they
had against the sharers thereof; was all laid up in store
till we came to land, to the intent of spending it ashore, at
a common feast, or drinking bout. At Sunset the Island
of Santa Lucia bore W. S. W. from us, and was at ten
leagues distance. Also the Island of Martinica bore N. W.
Isle of Martinica.

by W. of us at twelve or thirteen leagues distance. We
had this day a very clear evening.

Sunday, January the 29th. We had a clear night and
a fresh wind at E. by N. and at E. N. E. Our reckoning
was a N. N. W. half W. way, and hereby forty six leagues.
By observation we took Lat. 15 D. 46 N. At noon this
day we saw the Island named la Desseada, or the Desired I-

la Desseada.
land, which then bore N. W. from us, and seemed to be
at eight leagues distance more or less. At six of the clock
in the evening, we saw likewise Marigalanta, another of
Marigalanta.
the Cariby Islands, at S. W. by W. from us, and that of
Guadalupe, streaking it self in several hammocks of land,
Guadalupe.
both Westward and Northward: as also la Desseada abovementioned
at S. E. which from thence showeth like tableland,
and at each end hath a low point running out. At
six this evening it was W. S. W. and at five or six leagues
distance from us. At the same time we saw the Island of
Monserrate, at a great distance from our ship; and making
Monserrate.
three round hammocks close together. This evening
likewise, we caught an Albicore of twenty pound weight.

Munday, January the 30th. We had a fair night all
the last past, and a fresh wind. Hereupon, all night we
halled up our main-sail in brails, standing at the same time


212

Page 212
N. by W. with the wind at E. N. E. At midnight we
stood N. W. At three in the morning we lay by until
five. Then we stood away W. N. W. until six; and at
that hour we stood W. At eight of the clock we saw the
la Antigua.
Island of la Antigua, called by us Antego, to the Southward
of us, making three round hammocks of land, and a long
high hill to Northw d. Hereupon, we stood W. S. W.
for it. At noon we found Lat. 17 D. N. the Island being
then just W. from us.

We came about to th S. of the Island, and sent a Canoa
on shore, for to get Tobacco, and other necessaries that we
wanted; as also to ask leave of the Governour to come into
the Port. The Gentry of the place and common people,
were very willing and desirous to receive us. But on
Wednesday, February the first, the Governour flatly denyed
us entry; at which all the Gentry were much grieved,
and shewed themselves very kind unto us. Hereupon

They give away
the ship.
we agreed among our selves, to give away, and leave the
ship unto them of our company, who had no money left
them of all their purchase in this Voyage, having lost it
And disperse.
all at play; and then to divide our selves into two Ships,
which were now bound for England. Thus I my self, and
thirteen more of our company, went on board Captain
Robert Porteen his ship, called the Lisbon Merchant, and
set sail from la Antigua on February the eleventh, and landed
at Dartmouth in England, March the 26th, Anno 1682.



No Page Number
[ILLUSTRATION]


No Page Number
FINIS.